CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S PROJECT MANUALehps.sharpschool.net/UserFiles/Servers/Server... · The...

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S

PROJECT MANUAL

for

Essexville Hampton Public Schools

Bid Package 1

May 6, 2015 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER ARCHITECT Spence Brothers K L Design Group, LLC 417 McCoskry Street 726 Abbot Road Saginaw, Michigan 48601 East Lansing, Michigan 48823 Phone: (989) 752-0400 Phone: (989) 860-4382 Fax: (989) 752-8769 Fax: (517) 337-7115

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 0110 – Cover Sheet & Table of Contents of 4

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S PROJECT MANUAL

PROJECT: Essexville Hampton Public Schools Bid Package 1 PROJECT ADDRESS: Essexville Hampton Public Schools 303 Pine Street Essexville, Michigan 48732 OWNER: Essexville Hampton Public Schools 303 Pine Street Essexville, Michigan 48732 ARCHITECT: K L Design Group, LLC 726 Abbot Road East Lansing, Michigan 48823 Contact: Tim Lichtenwald CONSTRUCTION Spence Brothers MANAGER: 417 McCoskry Street Saginaw, Michigan 48601 Phone: (989) 752-0400 Fax: (989) 752-8769 Contact: Matthew Spence [email protected]


SECTION 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00 0110 Project Manual Cover & Table of Contents

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

00 1000 Invitation to Bid 00 2000 Instruction to Bidders 00 2200 Bid Category General Notes 00 2213 Bid Category 1A - Demolition 00 2213 Bid Category 1B – General Trades / Lockers 00 2213 Bid Category 1C - Roofing 00 2213 Bid Category 1D – Mechanical / Boilers 00 2300 Milestone Schedule General Notes 00 2301 Milestone Schedule 00 3143 Permits 00 4000 Bid Proposal Form 00 6100 Bonds 00 6500 Certificates of Insurance 00 7000 General Conditions of the Contract 00 7319 Safety Requirements with Job Specific Safety Manual

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1000 Summary 01 1400 Work Restrictions 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900 Payment Procedures 01 2977 Sworn Statement and Waivers 01 2978 Sworn Statement – Sample 01 2979 Partial Waiver - Sample 01 2980 Full Waiver - Sample 01 3113 Coordination of Project 01 3114 Coordination Drawings 01 3119 Project Management and Meetings 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation 01 3330 Submittals 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 6000 Bidding Substitutions 01 6005 Substitutions 01 7000 Execution Requirements 01 7329 Cutting and Patching 01 7700 Closeout Procedures 01 7836 Warranties and Guaranties 01 7839 Project Record Documents Prevailing Wage Rates


ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEER DOCUMENTS ISSUED FOR BIDDING:

K L Design Group Drawings, dated April 2015 K L Design Group General Specifications, dated April 2015 Spence Brothers Project Manual, dated May 6, 2015

END OF SECTION 00 0110

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 1000 - Invitation for Bids Page 1 of 3

SECTION 00 1000 INVITATION TO BID

Notice is hereby given that

Essexville Hampton Public Schools Will be accepting Bids for the Construction of:

Essexville Hampton Schools Bid Package 1

00 2213 Bid Category 1A - Demolition 00 2213 Bid Category 1B – General Trades / Lockers 00 2213 Bid Category 1C – Roofing 00 2213 Bid Category 1D – Mechanical / Boilers

According to drawings and specifications as prepared by K L Design Group and the Construction Manager’s Project Manual, as prepared by Spence Brothers. The project will consist of work in four schools located within the school district. Cramer Junior High will be adding lockers to the 5th grade wing. Garber High School will be replacing lockers and roofing upgrades. Bush Elementary will be replacing lockers, upgrading roofing, removal of an existing chimney and mechanical upgrades. Verellen Elementary will be replacing and adding lockers. Construction will start available to start June 15, 2015 and have a substantial completion date of August 30, 2015. Proposals will be received no later than 2:00 PM EST on Wednesday, May 20, 2015. Post bid meetings will be arranged with the apparent low bidders on Thursday, May 21, 2015 starting at 2:00 PM. Spence Brothers will contact the bidders for exact times after the bids are opened. Proposals shall be submitted in TRIPLICATE (3) for all work categories as described in the Project Manual for the above project and should be addressed and delivered to Essexville Hampton Public Schools, Jaffe Administration Building, 303 Pine Street, Essexville, Michigan 48732. Bids shall be delivered to the office. Proposals shall be submitted in a sealed envelope clearly marked with the bid category name and number, and shall be identified with the project name and the bidder’s name and address. Sealed bid proposals will be received from trade contractors submitting only complete bids on a bid category. All other subcontractors and suppliers shall submit their bids to the trade contractors. All bid proposals will be privately opened in the presence of the Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager. Fax bids will not be accepted. No bids will be accepted at the office of the Construction Manager or the Architect. All bids received after the bid due time on the bid due date will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened.


Your proposal envelope shall be labeled:

ESSEXVILLE HAPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS BID PACKAGE 1

Bid envelope must include the bid category name, number, and your company name. Bid Category Bidders may obtain bidding documents (Architect’s plans and specifications and CM Project Manual) as .pdf files available on CD at NO COST to the subcontractors. Please contact Carolyn Spence at 989-752-0400 or [email protected]. Bid Category Bidders may download the plans online from Spence Brothers’ FTP web site. Instructions to download this project on line:

1. While this example discusses using Windows Explorer to access the site, you are free to utilize other FTP programs to access the site if you wish.

2. Open up Windows Explorer (NOT Internet Explorer). You can do this by going to Start -> All Programs -> Accessories -> Windows Explorer, or by right clicking on the Start Icon and picking Explore.

3. In the Address line, enter ftp://plans.spencebrothers.com 4. You should get a login box automatically. If not, click File in the upper left, and pick “Login as…”. 5. In the login dialog box, enter the user name and password for the desired job. 6. The login information for this job is:

Username: EssexvilleSchools Password: Bidding (Note: The password is case sensitive)

7. A folder listing should appear for the given job. You can then copy/paste the desired files to your desktop for viewing. It is not recommended to open the files directly on the FTP server. It will produce errors.

Bid Category Bidders may also view the plans at:

• Construction Manager’s Saginaw Office: Spence Brothers, 417 McCoskry Street, Saginaw, Michigan 48601 (Phone: 989-752-0400 // Fax: 989-752-8769).

Spence Brothers’ FTP site is the official location for all bidding documents and related correspondence for this project. This includes, but not limited to notices, drawings, specifications, project manuals, addenda, clarifications, etc. All pre-bid Requests for Information need to be submitted to the Construction Manager, Matthew Spence via email at [email protected] or by fax at (989) 752-8769. All questions must be submitted in writing no later than 12:00 PM Friday May 15th, 2015. No direct contact with the Owner, Architect, or consulting Engineers is permitted. It is each bidder’s responsibility to make sure they have received (any) addenda issued for this project. There will be a Pre-Bid Conference scheduled for all trades on:

Wednesday, May 13th, 2015 at 3:00 PM Bush Elementary Gymnasium 800 Nebobish Essexville, Michigan 48732

ftp://plans.spencebrothers.com/

mailto:[email protected]


The Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager will provide a tour of the site. Questions and discussions will be entertained regarding the bidding process, construction schedule, site conditions, and any other related matters. Attendance at the pre-bid conference is strongly recommended but not mandatory. Bidders will be responsible for all content covered in this meeting. If you absolutely cannot make this meeting, please contact the project manager, Matthew Spence at 989-752-0400 or [email protected]. Failure to attend the pre-bid conference or contact the project manager could result in dismissal or your bid.

Substantial completion dates for the work in each Bid Category shall be as indicated in the Milestone Schedule in the Construction Manager’s Project Manual. All proposals submitted shall remain valid for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid date. The Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager reserve the right to accept and/or reject any or all bid proposals and to waive any and all informalities and/or irregularities in bid proposals submitted. This right shall be exercised at the sole discretion of Emerson School. Spence Brothers will make awards as may appear to be in the best interest of Emerson School. Bid Bonds are required with the proposal. Bid Security by a qualified surety authorized to do business in the State where the Project is located and in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid shall accompany each proposal or proposal combination. The Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond, Cashier’s Check, or Money Order. Personal checks are NOT acceptable. Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid date. Successful Bidders may be required to furnish the cost of Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of their bid. The cost of the Bond shall be included on each proposal form separate from the base bid. The Construction Manager will direct, supervise, coordinate, and manage the project. Overall administration of the Project will be the responsibility of the Construction Manager, Spence Brothers. The Construction Manager will award contracts for separate bid divisions or combinations of bid divisions. All bids shall be submitted on the bid proposal forms provided in the Construction Manager’s Project Manual, completely filled in, and executed (copies of the bid forms are acceptable).


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 2000 – Instructions to Bidders Page 1 of 6

SECTION 00 2000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ESSEXVILLE HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS

1. Preparation of Proposals Essexville Hampton Public Schools (also referred to as the “Owner”), K L Design Group

(also referred to as the “Architect”), and Spence Brothers (also referred to as the “Construction Manager”) shall be referred to as such throughout the Instructions to Bidders and CM Project Manual.

Spence Brothers’ FTP site is the official location for all bidding documents and related

correspondence for this project. This includes, but is not limited to notices, drawings, specifications, project manuals, addenda, clarifications, etc. It is each bidder’s responsibility to make sure they have received (any) addenda issued for this project.

Bids on Proposal Forms identical to the forms included in the bidding documents shall be filled

in completely including any applicable alternate prices and unit prices. Bid amounts must be in words as well as figures. Proposals that are not filled in completely may be rejected.

Proposals may be rejected which do not include a bid amount, PLM bond cost, bid bond, noted

addenda (if any), noted alternates (if any), percentages for changes in the work, or a signed Proposal Form. Proposals that contain qualifications and/or modifications to the base proposal may also be rejected. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids in whole or in part and waive any informality herein.

Signatures must be in long hand and executed by the principal duly authorized to make

contracts. The bidder’s legal name must be fully stated. If a contractor elects to bid more than one bid category, then a separate proposal form must be

submitted for each bid category.

Each proposal shall be submitted in TRIPLICATE (3), one original and two photocopies, and sealed in an opaque envelope addressed to Essexville Hampton Public Schools, Jaffe Administration Building, 303 Pine Street, Essexville, Michigan 48732. Bids shall be delivered to the office.

Proposals shall be submitted in a sealed envelope clearly marked with the bid category name and number, and shall be identified with the project name and the bidder’s name and address.

Proposals must be submitted at the time and location specified in the “Invitation for Bids”.

Submission time for each Bidder’s proposal will be recorded at the time of delivery. All bid proposals will be privately opened in the presence of the Owner, Architect, and

Construction Manager. Fax bids will not be accepted. No bids will be accepted at the office of the Construction Manager or the Architect. All bids received after the bid due time on the bid due date will not be accepted and will be returned to the Bidder unopened. The Owner complies


with all federal and state laws and regulations including the requirement not to contract with sanctioned individuals or companies.

The successful selected Bidder, for each bid category, will be required to furnish a cost breakdown for their respective bid category. Each bid category will be required to furnish separate costs on the schedule of values, as part of your pay application, for each type of work as follows.

2. Discrepancies and Questions All questions regarding discrepancies or ambiguities in or omissions from the contract

documents shall be forwarded to Spence Brothers in writing at once, or in any case, not less than seven (7) days before the bid due date. Spence Brothers shall forward all questions to the Architect (except those regarding delineating scope of work between bid categories). After these are reviewed and where information sought is not clearly indicated or specified, a written addendum or clarification to all bidders of record shall be issued. The Owner, Architect, or Spence Brothers not shall be responsible for any oral instructions.

3. Examination of Site It shall be understood that each Bidder has been given the opportunity to visit the site and knows

the conditions under which the work will be done. Lack of such knowledge will not constitute a basis for any claims whatsoever for extra compensation or extension of time.

4. Work by Owner All item on drawings marked “N.I.C,” “By Owner,” or otherwise designated to be furnished or

accomplished by others are for purpose of location and information only and are not included in the Contract.

5. Proposal Price Each bidder affirms that he has been given the opportunity to familiarize himself with all of the

Contract Documents, and agrees that the cost of all Work specifically called for, or reasonably inferred, has been included in the proposal price.

6. Taxes Each bidder shall include in his proposal, and agrees to pay all fees and taxes, including Sales

and Use, which he may be required to pay in connection with the performance of the contract. Also, all contributions for unemployment compensation, health and welfare, old age benefits, or other purposes now or hereafter effective during the term of the contract, and the Owner and Construction Manager shall not be liable for any additional charges therefore.

7. Alternates Alternates are indicated on the Proposal Form. Each bidder is required to review these Alternates

and submit an ADD or DEDUCT cost for any Alternates affecting the work in the Bid Category they are bidding. If the Alternate does not apply, so indicate with Not Applicable (N/A) in the space provided.


8. Voluntary Alternates Voluntary Alternates / Value Engineering Options are encouraged. However, all bids shall be in

compliance with the Bid Documents. In the event a bidder wishes to propose an alternative material or method, such alternate shall be identified on the Proposal Form as a Voluntary Alternate. Voluntary Alternates shall not be included in a base bid amount. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any Voluntary Alternate.

9. Bonds Bid Bonds are required with the proposal. Bid Security by a qualified surety authorized to do

business in the State where the Project is located and in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid shall accompany each proposal or proposal combination. The Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond, Cashier’s Check, or Money Order. Personal checks are NOT acceptable. Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid date.

Performance and Payment Bonds may be required from Trade Contractors on this Contract.

Bidders are required to furnish the cost of Performance and Payment Bonds in the amount of 100% of their bid in accordance with Section 00 6100 – Bonds of this Project Manual. Cost for said bonds is not to be included in the base bid, but shall be quoted as requested on the Proposal Form in Section 00 4000.

10. Coordination with All Trades Drawings and specifications are issued as a complete bound set, including civil, architectural,

structural, mechanical, and electrical work, to all bidders. Bidders or sub-bidders for each trade are responsible for informing themselves of work by other trades and of their own responsibility in coordination and interfacing involved.

11. Indemnification and General Liability Insurance The successful trade contractor shall agree to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect,

and Spence Brothers from and against any and all general liability claims whatsoever arising out of or occurring during and occasioned directly or indirectly by its negligence or fault. Prior to entering into a contract, the successful trade contractor shall provide evidence satisfactory to the Owner, Architect, and Spence Brothers of adequate general liability insurance coverage in this regard, naming the Owner, Architect, and Spence Brothers as additional insured. The Trade Contractor shall also provide evidence of Worker’s Compensation Insurance in the amounts required by the State of Michigan.

12. Equal Employment Opportunity Clause The Owner is an equal opportunity employers and non-discriminatory in their policies and

practices. In the performance of any contract, or purchase order resulting herefrom, the bidder, contractor,

subcontractor, or vendor agrees and covenants not to discriminate against an employee or applicant for employment for any reason directly or indirectly related to employment, because of race, color, religion, national original, age, sex, handicap or disabled or Vietnam era veteran status.


The provisions of Section 202 of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 503 of the

Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and 38 USC2012, the Vietnam Era Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as amended, are incorporated herein by specific reference.

The bidder, contractor, subcontractor, or vendor agrees to and is in compliance with other

Federal, State, and local law, published rules, regulations, directives, and orders that govern equal opportunity in matters related to employment.

13. Minority Subcontractors and Suppliers Applicants are urged to utilize the services of minority subcontractors and suppliers where

possible in the pursuance of this project. 14. Non-Collusion Clause By submitting and signing this proposal, the applicant declares that neither the firm nor agents

of the firm’s business or any other members of the proposed team have entered into any collusion or agreement concerning any aspect of the proposal.

15. Legal Structure and Authority Each proposal shall include the legal name of the organization and a statement as to whether or

not it is a sole proprietorship, a partnership, a corporation, or any other legal entity. A proposal by a corporation shall also give the state of incorporation and have a corporate seal affixed, identify the principal place of business and its registered office in the State of Michigan. Each proposal shall be signed by the person legally authorized to bind the contractor to a contract.

16. Compliance with Law The applicant shall be required to comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, or

Local law, both in its response hereto and in provision of services. 17. Proposal Held Open No applicant shall be permitted to withdraw their proposal for a period of sixty (60) days after

the time and date as set forth above. All proposals shall remain valid and binding for that period of time.

18. Reservation of Rights

a) The Owner reserves the right to accept any proposal or proposals in whole or part, to negotiate further regarding any terms of the proposal with one or more applicants to achieve the best proposal as determined by the Owner at its sole discretion, and to reject any or all proposals, for any reason whatsoever, should it be deemed in the best interest to the Owner to do so.

b) Negotiation, if undertaken by the Owner, is intended to result in a contract which is deemed

by the Owner in its sole discretion to be in the Owners’ best interest. Any such negotiation will use the selected proposal or proposals as a basis to reach a final agreement, if possible.


c) The Owner reserves the right to include in the contract for services other terms and conditions not specifically set forth here.

d) The Owner reserves the right to waive or disregard any informality, irregularity, or

deficiency in any proposal. e) The competency and responsibility of the invited subcontractors has been considered prior

to the invitation to bid, however, the Owner does not obligate himself to the lowest or any other bidder and reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, in whole or in part, and to waive any informalities therein.

19. Contract Agreement The successful trade contractors will be assigned as subcontractors to the Construction

Manager, who will direct, supervise, coordinate and manage the project. 20. Cancellation of Project The Owner reserves the right to cancel the project and contract at any point. The contractor will

be reimbursed for work performed up to cancellation based upon the amount of work completed.

21. Combined Bids If a contractor chooses to submit a Combined Bid, they must still submit individual bids on

separate bid forms for the respective bid categories they are including in their Combined Bid. The Combined Bid amount shall be included on all individual bid forms. Each individual bid must be complete without exclusions or qualifications.

22. Award of Contract It is the Owner’s intent to award a contract to the lowest responsible and competent bidder

provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents and does not exceed the funds available for construction. The Owner reserves the right to award to the bidder which in his judgment has submitted the bid which is in the Owner’s best interest.

23. Bid Qualifications Bidders are to bid complete Bid Category only, without qualifications or exclusions. Bidders are

to submit proposals for only bid category(s) for which they are qualified to bid. 24. Michigan Products

All prime bidders and their subcontract bidders and suppliers shall utilize Michigan made

products whenever possible where price, quality and performance are equal to or better than non-Michigan products.


25. Warranty All work shall be guaranteed for a period of two (2) years, unless more specifically stated in the

contract documents, from the date of substantial completion of the entire work in this bid package as determined by the Architect, and all service within that period shall be rendered without charge to the Owner. This two (2) year warranty period will take precedence over the one (1) year as indicated throughout the Architectural specification divisions 1 through 16. This does not apply to any specified extended manufacturer’s warranties.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 2200 – Bid Category General Notes Page 1 of 7

SECTION 00 2200 BID CATEGORY GENERAL NOTES


The following is a description of the work for bid categories for this project. All work relative to the bid categories is identified on plans and specifications as prepared by the Architect. Each bid category work description identifies the scope of work to be performed by the bidder as designated by the Construction Manager. All bidders are responsible for reviewing their bid category work description and the other bid category work descriptions and all contract documents, and should immediately advise the Construction Manager of any conflicts or ambiguities which may affect the bidding and/or execution of this contract work. Each contractor will also be responsible for familiarizing themselves with all bid category work descriptions so they may coordinate their work accordingly. Each bidder will agree to coordinate their work with the work and requirements of /all subsequent bid package documents. These bid category work descriptions should in no way be construed as being all inclusive. It is issued as a guide to aid in the assignment of work. If conflict regarding assignment of work exists between the Architect’s drawings and specifications and the Construction Manager’s bid category work descriptions, the bid category work descriptions will take precedence in work assignment. The Construction Manager’s assignment of the Work precludes that of the Architect’s drawings and/or specification. Bid Categories are the divisions of Work which the Project is divided for bidding and subsequently the construction. Bid Categories shall not be confused with the Architect’s Technical Specification Divisions. Bidders are required to bid an entire bid category. Bids will only be accepted for complete individual bid categories. Combined bids covering more than one bid category will not be accepted unless separate bid amounts are listed for each bid category included in the combined bid. BID CATEGORIES AND DESCRIPTIONS

00 2213 Bid Category 1A - Demolition 00 2213 Bid Category 1B – General Trades / Lockers 00 2213 Bid Category 1C - Roofing 00 2213 Bid Category 1D – Mechanical / Boilers


GENERAL NOTES for

BID CATEGORY WORK DESCRIPTIONS

The following are General Notes applicable to all bid categories.

1. Essexville Hampton Public Schools (also referred to as the “Owner”), K L Design Group (also

referred to as the “Architect”), and Spence Brothers (also referred to as the “Construction Manager”), shall be referred as such throughout the CM Project Manual.

2. The Bid Category Contractor (also referred to as “General Contractor” or “Contractor” or “Trade

Contractor”) shall cooperate and coordinate with other Bid Category Contractors for expedient completion of the work of this project.

3. The Bid Category Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with Contractors directly hired by the

Owner which are not included as another Bid Category Contractor listed above. 4. TESTING: The Bid Category Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with testing agencies hired

by the Owner or Construction Manager for testing of soil, materials, and other testing specified. Bid Category Contractor is responsible for all other testing required by the specifications and for re-testing of corrected work after any failed initial tests.

5. LAYOUT: The Bid Category Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with layout agencies hired by

the Owner or Construction Manager. The Construction Manager will provide basic control lines and benchmarks. Engineering layout above and beyond the basic control lines and benchmarks shall be provided by the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to verify actual field dimensions against those furnished on construction drawings and advise Construction Manager of any discrepancies before proceeding. Each contractor is responsible for protection of reference points and replacement of such points that are lost or damaged during the execution of their work.

6. SAFETY: The scope of work for each Bid Category includes the following safety requirements and procedures.

a. The Contractor shall take all reasonable safety precautions with respect to their work,

shall comply with all safety measures initiated by the Construction Manager, and with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority for the safety of persons or property and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The contractor shall report immediately to the Construction Manager any unsafe condition or any injury to any of the Contractor’s employees at the site.

b. The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager against loss by fines, penalties or corrective measures resulting from acts of commission or omission by the Contractor, its agents, employees or assigns, with respect to violation of safety requirements of this Contract.

c. All openings made by a trade contractor shall be covered by that trade per MIOSHA requirements.


d. If handrail or other safety device must be removed by a trade contractor, it shall be replaced by that contractor as soon as possible.

e. In addition to the above safety requirements, all contractors shall abide by “Spence Brothers Safety Program,” which is enclosed in this Project Manual.

f. In the event Contractor encounters on-site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other hazardous materials, which have not been rendered harmless, Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to Construction Manager in writing.

g. Each Contractor shall be responsible to wear (PPE), per MIOSHA requirements, to safety conduct construction activities where lead-based paint is present. Buildings constructed prior to 1978 may contain lead-based paint materials. The Owner will make available a lead-based paint survey to all contractors performing work where existing painted surfaces may/will be disturbed during construction.

h. Each Contractor shall be responsible to maintain on the jobsite Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any substance deemed hazardous to health per Michigan Department of Labor, Part A1, or other applicable laws.

i. The current requirements, laws and ordinances prohibiting disposal of any contaminants and contaminated substances on site will be strictly enforced.

7. SUBMITTALS: The scope of work for each Bid Category includes the following submittal

requirements and procedures.

a. “Contract Submittals” consist of signed contracts, Insurance certificates, Performance and Payment Bond (if required), Schedule of Values, Employee List, Subcontractor list, Supplier List, Hourly Rates, Safety Manual, and MSDS Sheets and shall be submitted to Spence Brothers within two (2) weeks of a Notice to Commence Work. Bonds and insurance certificates shall be submitted to Spence Brothers prior to the contractor’s start of work. Labor rates shall be submitted for all worker classifications, and include the base rate, all fringe benefits, insurances, small tools (any tool typically used by this bid category). Labor rates shall not include any overhead and profit. Rates shall be submitted for regular, overtime, and double time.

b. “Shop Drawings Submittals” generally consist of shop drawings, technical data, product information, product samples, and color selections and shall be submitted to Spence Brothers within two (2) weeks of a Notice to Commence Work

8. CLEAN UP: Clean up and removal of identifiable debris and rubbish from site. Piles of debris

packing materials, etc., will not be allowed to remain. Clean up and removal of debris from site must be kept under control and shall be done on a daily basis. If clean up is not performed on a daily basis, the CM will notify, in writing, the contractor is to perform daily clean up, and document the failure to do so. In the event this action proves to be unsuccessful, the CM will make arrangements to hire clean up services and back charge each contractor accordingly for such clean up services.


9. DUMPSTERS: The Construction Manager will NOT provide dumpsters for proper legal off-site disposal of debris. All demolition waste shall be sorted and disposed of on site. No demolition materials will become the property of the contractor. It must be sorted, placed in appropriate dumpster, and will be disposed of by the Construction Manager. The Owner reserves the right to salvage any materials removed from the site during the course of this Project.

10. STREET CLEANING: Contractor’s will be responsible for cleaning of streets and walks of mud

and debris caused by their own work or delivery materials for their work. Any mud tracked onto roadways will be cleaned at once by the Contractor that created the mud deposit.

11. ON-SITE STORAGE: Short term on-site storage shall be coordinated with the Construction

Manager. Contractor may have to relocate stored material at their own expense to allow work of other Contractors to proceed.

12. DELIVERIES: Materials must be delivered “just-in-time”. NO DELIVERIES daily between

the hours of 7:30 AM - 8:30 AM or between 2:00 PM – 3:00 PM.

13. HOISTING: Hoisting, including cranes, lifts, lifting apparatuses, etc. to perform your work.

14. BARRICADES: Barricades and traffic maintenance as required

15. SNOW REMOVAL: Snow or ice removal as required to perform work in a safe and timely manner.

16. PROFANITY: Profane and/or abusive language will not be tolerated

17. PERMITS: Other than the general building permit, each Contractor shall obtain and pay for all

other permits, assessments, fees, bonds, connection charges, inspection fees, and any other charges necessary to complete their contract. All work is to comply with the rules and regulations of governing bodies having jurisdiction. Work shall be performed by skilled trades’ people having experience in performing the work.

18. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Contractors shall examine the conditions under which the

work is to be installed and notify the Construction Manager in writing of any discrepancies or conditions detrimental to proper performance of the work. Contractors are not to proceed until the required corrections are accomplished. Each Contractor is responsible to review the site and be familiar with all existing conditions within and around the facility, including local conditions and requirements.

19. SUPERVISION: Each Contractor shall have a supervisor on site at all times when a crew is

present on the site. Subcontractors are required to retain the same superintendent / foreman / project manager for the duration of the project unless a change in personnel has been approved in advance by the Construction Manager.

20. COORDINATION: Provide to all other Trade Contractors all information and other related items

(drawings, diagrams, templates, embedded items, etc.) necessary for the proper coordination of the work. All Contractors are to coordinate their work with the work of other trades and the Owner’s functions through the Construction Manager for proper function and sequence to avoid construction delays


21. CUTTING AND PATCHING: Where new work connects with existing, including work already completed on this project, do all necessary cutting and patching required to make a satisfactory connection with the work to be performed under these sections so as to leave the entire work in a finished and workmanlike condition. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work, whether or not shown or specified, unless this work is clearly shown to be part of another Bid Category.

22. DUST CONTROL: All Contractors will be responsible for proper control of dust generated by

their operation and will be responsible for a daily area cleanup.

23. SCAFFOLDING: Each Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary scaffolding and planking needed to perform his work

24. TEMPORARY FENCE: Temporary fence around the building site and storage areas will be

provided as determined by the Owner and Construction Manager. Gates will be installed for personnel and equipment access at locations determined by the Construction Manager. All temporary removal and reinstallation of any temporary fencing will be done by the Contractor requiring it. Site access and fencing will be per the attached site logistics plan. All traffic entering the site, placement of construction trailers, and placement of stored materials must be coordinated with the Construction Manager.

25. TEMPORARY UTILITIES: Temporary utilities including electricity, water, and gas, will be

provided by others (or by trade contractors if in their Bid Category scope) at locations on the site determined by the Owner and Construction Manager. Contractors will provide their own cords, hoses, etc. from these main source locations.

26. TEMPORARY HEAT: Temporary heat inside the building will be provided by others as soon as

the building can be enclosed. Fuel consumption costs for temporary heat will be paid by the Construction Manager.

27. WINTER PROTECTION: Winter protection and heat for work prior to building enclosure or for

work on the exterior of the building will be provided and paid for by the trade requiring it.

28. TEMPORARY TOILETS: Temporary toilet facilities will be provided by the Construction Manager.

29. REPAIRS: Contractors must restore any damaged work or area that they were responsible for

damaging to original or better condition with no detectable evidence that the area has been repaired. Repair of work shall be done by the original installer of said work. Contractors are responsible for any damage to walks, drives, landscaping, lawns and structures. Contractor will be responsible for repairs or be charged accordingly for replacement costs. Any Contractor who compounds a mistake by installing their work on another Contractor’s faulty work will assume responsibility for repair and correction of said work.

30. REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION: If there is a discrepancy in the documents or information is

not understood, bidders shall submit a request for information in writing to the construction manager as soon as possible. Bidder shall be responsible to confirm that the Construction Manager has received any RFI submitted, either during the pre-bid process or during construction.


31. WARRANTY: All work shall be guaranteed for a period of two (2) years, unless more specifically stated in the contract documents, from the date of substantial completion of the entire work in this bid package as determined by the Architect, and all service within that period shall be rendered without charge to the Owner. This two (2) year warranty period will take precedence over a one (1) year warranty period if indicated in the Architectural specification. Any specific manufacturer’s warranties longer than two years shall still apply.

32. THIRD TIER SUBCONTRACTORS: It is the responsibility of the bidder to confirm that third

tier subcontractors are capable of performing the work assigned to them in a timely, high quality and safe manner. Information may be requested at the post-bid scope review meeting to substantiate these qualifications, based on successful completion of similar projects for their scope of work.

33. TIME & MATERIAL: Contractors who perform work on a Time and Material (T&M) basis are

required to submit daily T&M sheets to the CM for approval and signature. The T&M sheet must contain a CM issued PCO number. Quotes for T&M work must be submitted within thirty (30) days of performing the work. If a quote is not submitted to the CM within thirty (30) days, it will be at the CM’s discretion as to whether or not to issue a change order.

34. SCHEDULE OF VALUES: Contractors shall include line items for the following in their

schedule of values:

a. Each contractor shall indicate 2% of their contract amount, as a line item, on their schedule of values, as “Clean Up”. In the event the contractor fails to perform clean up, the Construction Manager may elect to hire another contractor to perform this work (throughout the project) and back charge the contractor for such costs towards this line item. In the event cleanup costs exceed this 2% amount, you will be back charged for the additional overage.

b. Each contractor shall indicate 3% of their contract amount, as a line item, on their schedule of values, as “Punch List”. In the event the contractor fails to complete their punch list items within two (2) weeks from the date of issuance of the Architect/Engineer’s punch list, the Construction Manager may elect to hire another contractor to perform this work and back charge the contractor for such costs towards this line item. In the event punch list costs exceed this 3% amount, you will be back charged for the additional overage:

35. WORK HOURS: Works hours are between the hours of 7:00 am and 4:00 pm daily. Each

contractor shall submit documentation of the amount of work hours performed by their forces. This information shall be submitted along with monthly pay applications.

36. COMMISSIONING: All Contractors will be responsible for any start up and commissioning

requirements related to their work. 37. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: All Contractors are to maintain and keep up-to-date a set of as-built

drawings applicable to their work to be incorporated into the Construction Manager’s As-Built drawings at the end of the project.

38. CLOSEOUT: One (1) hard copy of all closeout documents shall be submitted at the end of the

project. An electronic copy of all submitted closeouts shall be submitted at time of submission also. The electronic copy shall be submitted on a CD and be organized in folders similar to the hard copy of the closeout manuals.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Category 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 1A - Page 1 of 2

BID CATEGORY 1A DEMOLITION


BID PACKAGE 1

WORK SCOPE The work of this Bid Category includes, but is not limited to the following work as shown on the drawings from K L Design Group, dated April 2015 and specified in the following documents: K L Design Group Specifications, dated 04-30-2015 Spence Brothers Project Manual, dated 04-30-2015 Basic Trade Specification Sections (include all work unless noted otherwise): 02070 – Selective Demolition Division 5 – Metals Additional Trade Specification Sections (include work related to this scope): General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions Division 1 01230 – Alternates 01270 – Unit Pricing This bid category includes adherence and coordination with all other technical specifications and bid scope categories interfacing with this scope of work. The bidder shall review all bid scope category descriptions so as to not misunderstand scope responsibilities. The lack of cross-referencing other categories will not release this bidder from the inclusion of all intended scope items. Provide the labor, material and equipment to execute the work described in the above noted documents, which INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: FURNISH AND INSTALL (Unless Otherwise Noted):

1. This work is for the removal of the chimney system, in its entirety, located at Bush Elementary School reference drawing B-A1.

2. Obtain and pay for all permits required for your work. 3. Notify and correspond with Miss Dig before work commences and throughout the course of

this project. 4. Engineering layout and grade certifications and all required layout for pavement boundaries,

elevations, radius points, etc. 5. Barricades, bracing and pedestrian routing at open excavation areas. 6. Site demolition including concrete, curbs, asphalt, and site utilities as indicated. Include

required saw cutting. 7. Shoring / Bracing as required for building structure footings. 8. Scaffolding and hoisting necessary to perform your work. 9. Remove existing louver as noted in demolition keynote 4 on sheet B-A1.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Category 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 1A - Page 2 of 2

10. Infill openings per construction keynote 2 on sheet B-A1. 11. Provide topsoil per construction keynote 3 on sheet B-A1 at the chimney removal and any

areas disturbed by your work.

WORK BY OTHERS:

1. Roofing 2. Interior building and locker demolition 3. Interior window demolition

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 6A - Page 1 of 2

BID CATEGORY 1B GENERAL TRADES & LOCKERS


BID PACKAGE 1

WORK SCOPE The work of this Bid Category includes, but is not limited to the following work as shown on the drawings from K L Design Group, dated April 2015 and specified in the following documents: K L Design Group Specifications, dated 04-30-2015 Spence Brothers Project Manual, dated 04-30-2015 Basic Trade Specification Sections (include all work unless noted otherwise):

06100 – Rough Carpentry 06402 – Interior Architectural Woodwork 09111 – Non Bearing Steel Framing 09250 – Gypsum Board 09653 – Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09912 – Interior Painting 10505 – Metal Lockers

Additional Trade Specification Sections (include work related to this scope): General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions Division 1 01230 – Alternates 01270 – Unit Pricing

02070 – Selective Demolition 05500 – Metal Fabrications 07920 – Joint Sealants Division 16 - Electrical This bid category includes adherence and coordination with all other technical specifications and bid scope categories interfacing with this scope of work. The bidder shall review all bid scope category descriptions so as to not misunderstand scope responsibilities. The lack of cross-referencing other categories will not release this bidder from the inclusion of all intended scope items. Provide the labor, material and equipment to execute the work described in the above noted documents, which INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: FURNISH AND INSTALL (Unless Otherwise Noted):

1. The basis of this package is the removal and installation of lockers and associated work at Bush Elementary, Cramer Junior High, Garber High and Verellen Elementary Schools.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 6A - Page 2 of 2

2. Building permit from the State of Michigan associated with your work. 3. Selective demolition for all necessary for the installation of lockers including the relocating

electrical switches and boxes 4. Removal of existing wood benches per demolition note 1 on sheet B-A1. 5. Removal of existing lockers as shown on the drawings in all schools. 6. New locker bases at all schools. 7. New rubber base at all schools. 8. New lockers as shown in all schools. 9. Demolition keynotes 1 and 2 on sheet C-A1. 10. Construction keynote 2 on sheet C-A1. 11. Removal and infill of windows on sheet G-A2. Includes stud, drywall, finish and painting. 12. Case work / cubbie as shown for one room in Verellen Elementary. 13. Demolition notes 1, 2 and 3 on sheet V-A1. 14. Shoring / Bracing required for selective demolition for work of this bid category. 15. Coordinate the location and sizes of all openings and penetrations with all contractors. 16. Scaffolding and hoisting required for the performance of this work. 17. No gaps, cracks or voids will be permitted between any items in this bid category’s work.

18. Blocking, toggle bolts, etc. to support wall mounted work by this package. 19. Interior architectural woodwork, Finish Carpentry, Millwork, cabinets, countertops,

backsplashes, hardware, accessories all related supports, fasteners, clips and sealants. 20. Plastic laminate cabinets/casework, countertops, backsplashes, hardware, accessories, all

related supports, fasteners, clips and sealants. 21. Plastic laminate countertops and backsplashes, hardware, accessories, and all related

supports, fasteners, clips and sealants. Tops shall be pre-drilled to accept accessories, mounted fixtures and any cutouts for mechanical and electrical work.

22. Adjustable shelving, clips, hardware, standards, brackets, and all necessary accessories for a complete installation.

23. Sealants where required for weather tight construction within this contractors work and/or where this contractors work abuts another contractors work.

WORK BY OTHERS:

1. Chimney demolition at bush 2. Roof removal and replacement 3. Mechanical

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 1C - Page 1 of 2

BID CATEGORY 1C ROOFING


BID PACKAGE 1


07540 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties

Additional Trade Specification Sections (include work related to this scope): General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions Division 1 01230 – Alternates 01270 – Unit Pricing

07920 Joint Sealants (related to you work) This bid category includes adherence and coordination with all other technical specifications and bid scope categories interfacing with this scope of work. The bidder shall review all bid scope category descriptions so as to not misunderstand scope responsibilities. The lack of cross-referencing other categories will not release this bidder from the inclusion of all intended scope items. Provide the labor, material and equipment to execute the work described in the above noted documents, which INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: FURNISH AND INSTALL (Unless Otherwise Noted):

1. Membrane roofing system including sheet metal, fastenings, elastic cement, insulation, closure strips, flashing, counter flashings, termination bars, battens, mastic, and all related supports, fasteners, clips and sealants. Tapered insulation to meet required slopes. Roof walkways also provided by this trade contractor.

2. Underlayment, metal drip edge, copings, flashings, pipe flashings and all related supports, fasteners, clips and sealants for all types of roof systems.

3. Vapor barrier (if shown) for all types of roof systems. 4. Cant strips and related blocking for the installation of the roofing system. 5. Plywood blocking related to roofing system. 6. Wood blocking at parapet walls.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 1C - Page 2 of 2

7. Sealing and closure at all roof penetrations, including seals, boots, steel clamps, sealants and flashings.

8. Insulation saddles for proper drainage. 9. Sheet metal/aluminum fascias, gravel stops, trims, closures, and all related supports,

fasteners, clips and sealants. 10. Vertical and horizontal building expansion joint/cover assembly and joint insulation (as an

integral part of the work performed by this bid category). 11. Furnish and install all gutters and downspouts. 12. Roof scuppers (see alternate). 13. Furnish and install splash blocks. 14. Roofing, flashing, etc. at Roof Top Unit curbs. 15. Pipe seals, flashing, roofing, etc. at mechanical and electrical penetrations (see mechanical

and electrical drawings). 16. Roof Expansion Joints. 17. Tie-In to existing roofs. 18. Removal of existing roofing membrane and roof insulation at both Bush Elementary and

Garber High School. 19. Dumpsters and disposal for the removal of roofing and accessories. 20. Clean substrate prior to installation of new system. 21. Include an allowance of 8000 sf of removal and replacement of wet / defective insulation at

Bush Elementary School. 22. Include an allowance of 15,000 sf of removal and replacement of wet / defective insulation at

Garber High School. 23. Mechanically fasten new insulation. 24. Include all flashings. 25. Roof walkway mats. 26. Repair damaged lawns and site work as a result of your work. 27. Building permit from the State of Michigan associated with your work. 28. See bid form for breakdown of bid – Bush Elementary Only, Garber High Only, All Roofing

combined. WORK BY OTHERS:

1. None

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 00 2213 Bid Category Scopes Bid Category 1D - Page 1 of 3

BID CATEGORY 1D MECHANICAL / BOILERS


BID PACKAGE 1


07841 Through Penetration Firestop Systems 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15060 Minor Mechanical Demolition for Remodeling 15121 Piping Expansion Compensation 15135 Gages and Meters 15140 Supports and Anchors 15190 Mechanical Identification 15260 Piping Insulation 15280 Equipment Insulation 15510 Hydronic Piping 15515 Hydronic Specialties 15540 Hydronic Pumps 15545 Chemical Water Treatment 15561 Hot Water Boilers 15575 Breechings 15990 Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16060 Minor Electrical Requirements 16111 Conduit 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16130 Boxes 16170 Grounding and Bonding 16190 Supporting Devices 16195 Electrical Identification 16481 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16482 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers

Additional Trade Specification Sections (include work related to this scope): General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions Division 1


01230 – Alternates 01270 – Unit Pricing

02070 – Selective Demolition 05500 – Metal Fabrications (related to your work) This bid category includes adherence and coordination with all other technical specifications and bid scope categories interfacing with this scope of work. The bidder shall review all bid scope category descriptions so as to not misunderstand scope responsibilities. The lack of cross-referencing other categories will not release this bidder from the inclusion of all intended scope items. Provide the labor, material and equipment to execute the work described in the above noted documents, which INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: FURNISH AND INSTALL (Unless Otherwise Noted):

1. Arrange for and pay all permit and inspection costs for this work. 2. The intent is to have this contract to remove and reinstall the boilers at Bush Elementary

including all electrical, piping, boilers, equipment pads, etc. for a complete system. 3. Demolition and removal of all mechanical and electrical systems including pipe and

equipment and similar mechanical items to accommodate removal existing boilers in Bush Elementary.

4. Plumbing demolition items specifically indicated on mechanical demolition drawings. 5. Plumbing terminations by this bid category. 6. Underground plumbing work. 7. Complete plumbing and plumbing fixtures for domestic hot and cold water systems including

connection into domestic water lines. This includes valves, hangers, supports, trim, fasteners, sleeves and other accessories for a complete installation.

8. Complete plumbing and plumbing fixtures for sanitary waste and storm systems. This includes valves, hangers, supports, trim, fasteners, sleeves and other accessories for a complete installation.

9. Piping for gas line system for bid categories on this project. This includes valves, hangers, supports, trim, fasteners, sleeves and other accessories for a complete installation.

10. Furnish and install gas meter and pressure regulator. Include all fees from Consumer’s Energy.

11. Pipe insulation for plumbing. 12. Pipe/equipment identification for plumbing. 13. Final plumbing hook-ups to all plumbing related fixtures and equipment. 14. Plumbing fixtures in cabinetry as required. 15. Complete plumbing controls, etc. 16. Trap primers. 17. Testing and balancing of plumbing system. 18. Firestopping and sealants for all penetrations of this work through fire-rated walls, floors,

ceilings, etc. Maintain fire and/or smoke rating in all walls, floors, ceilings, etc. penetrated. 19. Cutting and patching required for all work of this Bid Category. 20. Concrete floor cutting and patching for work of this Bid Category. 21. Remove spoils from site. 22. Dumpster, removal and disposal for your work.


23. Cut all roof and wall penetrations to perform plumbing work. Cutting and protecting roof deck openings for plumbing work. Coordinate with roofing and sheet metal contractors for roof penetrations and pipe boots, including layouts.

24. Coordinate patching of existing roof system for mechanical work with Owner’s roofing representative.

25. Any unfinished surface mounted items (piping, covers, etc.), that are scheduled to receive paint, which have been installed after painting work is complete, will be the responsibility of this bid category to bear the cost of final paint.

26. Interior concrete house keeping pads required for equipment, by this bid category. 27. Interior piping support rails. 28. Start up training for with Owner’s Representative, Architect and Construction Manager for

all mechanical equipment. 29. Final connections of Owner furnished plumbing equipment by this bid category.

WORK BY OTHERS:

1. Roofing

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 2300 – Milestone Schedule General Notes Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 2300 MILESTONE SCHEDULE


The Trade Contractor shall coordinate construction scheduling and operations with the Construction Manager and other trade contractors so as to meet the milestone completion dates outlined in this section. The following list of activities is not intended to be a complete breakdown of the Trade Contractor’s work; it is rather a list of project milestones which must be met by the trade contractor in order to insure timely project completion. Trade Contractors are to include all costs to meet these dates. If a bidder feels any milestone dates appear impossible or unreasonable to meet, without including significant acceleration costs, notify Spence Brothers in writing prior to the bid date. If Spence Brothers, upon reviewing such notifications, determines that any change in the Milestone Schedule would be in the project’s best interest, this schedule may be adjusted by addendum. Because it is in the best interest of all parties to complete this project on schedule, Spence Brothers reserve the right to take the following action(s), if these milestone dates are in danger of not being met:

1. Trade Contractor(s) will be directed to increase crew size and/or equipment on site.

2. Trade Contractor(s) will be directed to add a second shift and/or work overtime.

3. If the above measures are not carried out satisfactorily by the Trade Contractor(s), or are not sufficient to get back on schedule, Spence Brothers can, upon three (3) days written notice, supplement the Trade Contractor(s) crews with additional personnel and equipment furnished by others, or take any other action necessary.

All costs associated with the above measures will be the responsibility of the Trade Contractor(s) involved, to the extent that the delay was not caused by others. If a Trade Contractor causes delay to others, that Trade Contractor will be responsible for any acceleration costs for other trades that are authorized by Spence Brothers, to get the project back on schedule. If any delay causes Spence Brothers to extend any milestone completion dates (in lieu of, or in addition to, taking any of the above acceleration actions) such time extension will be the sole remedy for all trade contractors for any such delay, unless contractor has been authorized by Spence Brothers to take acceleration measures as noted above.

Essexville Hampton School Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 2300 – Milestone Schedule Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 2300 MILESTONE SCHEDULE


Completion of Project Documents April 30, 2015 CM Final Document Review April 30, 2015 – May 6, 2015 Bidding Period May 6, 2015 – May 20, 2015 Pre-Bid Conference at Bush Elementary May 13, 2015 @ 3:00 PM Pre-Bid RFI Cut-Off May 15, 2015 @ 3:00 PM Bids Due at Jaffe Administration, Essexville Schools May 20, 2015 @ 2:00 PM Post-Bid Interviews May 21, 2015 Award and Recommendations to Owner May 26, 2015 Bid Pack 1A - Demolition Award Contracts / Procurement May 26, 2015 – May 29, 2015

Construction June 15, 2015 – July 30, 2015

Bid Pack 1B – General Trades / Lockers Award Contracts / Procurement May 26, 2015 – May 29, 2015 Submittals June 1, 2015 – June 17, 2015 Submittal Review June 17, 2015 – June 26, 2015 Construction June 15, 2015 – September 1, 2015 Bid Package 1C – Roofing Award Contracts / Procurement May 26, 2015 – May 29, 2015 Submittals June 1, 2015 – June 17, 2015 Submittal Review June 17, 2015 – June 26, 2015 Construction June 15, 2015 – October 16, 2015 Bid Package 1D – Mechanical / Boilers Award Contracts / Procurement May 26, 2015 – May 29, 2015 Submittals June 1, 2015 – June 17, 2015 Submittal Review June 17, 2015 – June 26, 2015 Construction June 15, 2015 – September 1, 2015

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 3143 – Permits Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 3143 PERMITS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Attention is directed to Bidding and Contract Requirements, and to Division 1, General

Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section. 1.02 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Construction Manager will NOT obtain and pay for the General Building Permit. B. Each Trade Contractor is to provide, pay for and coordinate all o permits; fees, inspections

and city, county, state, federal and governing authority approvals required for the successful completion of the work contained within their respective bid category and deliver required certificates of inspection and approvals to Spence Brothers.

C. This project is under the following jurisdictions:

Building Permit State of Michigan Life Safety State of Michigan

Electrical / Mechanical State of Michigan


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 4000 – Proposal Form Page 1 of 7

SECTION 00 4000 PROPOSAL FORM

PROJECT Essexville Hampton Public Schools Bid Package No. 1 OWNER Essexville Hampton Public Schools 303 Pine Street Essexville, Michigan 48732 ARCHITECT K L Design Group, LLC 726 Abbot Road East Lansing, Michigan 48823 CONSTRUCTION Spence Brothers MANAGER 417 McCoskry Street Saginaw, Michigan 48601 Phone: (989) 752-0400 Fax: (989) 752-8769 Contact: Matthew Spence Email: [email protected] BID PROPOSAL Prior to Wednesday, May 20, 2015 DUE DATE at 2:00 PM (local time) PROPOSAL SUBMITTED BY: ________________________________________________ (Contractor) The Undersigned has visited the site and familiarized themselves with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work and the Contract Documents, including plans, the Architect’s drawings, and Project Manual, the Construction Manager’s Project Manual, and all the labor, materials, tools, expendable equipment and transportation services, etc., necessary to perform and complete in a workmanlike manner all work required under the Bid Category(s) quoted below for the aforementioned project, all in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, as prepared by the Architect and Construction Manager. Prequalified bidders may bid only on the Bid Category(s) for which they are qualified to bid.


Bids on Proposal Forms identical to the forms included in the bidding documents shall be filled in completely, including any applicable alternate prices and unit prices. Bid amounts must be in words as well as figures. Proposals that are not filled in completely may be rejected.

Proposals may be rejected which do not include a bid amount, PLM bond costs, bid bond, noted addenda (if any), noted alternate (if any), percentages for changes in the work, or a signed proposal form.

Proposals that contain qualifications and/or modifications to the base proposal may be rejected.

Signatures must be in long hand and executed by the principal duly authorized to make contracts. The bidder’s legal name must be fully stated.

If a contractor elects to bid more than one bid category, then a separate proposal form must be submitted for each bid category. BASE BID Bid Category No.: 1A - Demolition Base Bid for the Lump Sum of ------------------------------------------------ ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours Bid Category No.: 1B – General Trades / Lockers Base Bid for the Lump Sum of ------------------------------------------------ ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours


Bid Category No.: 1C - Roofing Base Bid - Bush Elementary ONLY for the Lump Sum of --------------- ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours Bid Category No.: 1C - Roofing Base Bid - Garber High School ONLY for the Lump Sum of ------------ ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours Bid Category No.: 1C – Roofing Combined Base Bid - Bush Elementary and Garber High School for the Lump Sum of --------------------------------------------------------- ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours Bid Category No.: 1D – Mechanical / Boilers Base Bid for the Lump Sum of ------------------------------------------------ ($ __________________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Add for the Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ------- ADD ---- ($ __________________ ) Boiler Manufacturer _____________________________________________________________ Total field labor hours included as part of the Lump Sum Proposal: _____________ Hours Contractor’s Name _________________________


ALTERNATES Refer to Section 01230 for Schedule of Alternates for a Complete Alternate Description Alternate No. B1: (15) Lockers along North wall Corridor 163. Alternate Bid for the Lump Sum of ----------------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ---------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ )

Alternate No. B2: Provide aluminum framed portable bench assemblies.

Alternate Bid for the Lump Sum of ----------------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ---------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ )

Alternate No. B3: Provide and install Cleaver Brooks Clean Fire style boiler systems.


Alternate No. C1: Provide and install an additional (98) corridor lockers.


Alternate No. C2: In lieu of (75) single tier lockers, change to (75) double tier lockers.

Alternate Bid for the Lump Sum of ----------------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ---------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) Contractor’s Name _________________________


Alternate No. C3: Provide a cost to remove the existing combination locks and provide new built in combination locks.

Alternate Bid for the Lump Sum of ----------------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ---------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) Alternate No. V1: Provide and install the coat cubbie and storage unit assembly,

Alternate Bid for the Lump Sum of ----------------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) ______________________________________________________________________Dollars Cost of Performance and Payment Bonds ---------------------- Add / Deduct ($ ______________ ) UNIT PRICES Unit Price No. 1: Removal of existing wet roof insulation and replacement with new roof insulation for Bush Elementary and Garber High School ($____________) per S.F. CHANGES IN THE WORK: For authorized changes in the work, involving additions to the work, the Undersigned agrees to perform, or to cause to be performed by the subcontractors, such authorized work at net cost to him plus the following percentages to be added to the cost to the Owner, which percentages shall include the contractor’s cost for on-site supervision and all overhead and profit. Additions Fee for work performed by your own forces: % (10% maximum for additions) Fee for work performed by subcontractors: % (5% maximum for additions) Fees for materials and equipment: % (10% maximum for additions)

COMPLETION TIME: The Undersigned agrees to commence submittals and work operations immediately upon notice of award of contract and to substantially complete the work on or before the milestone dates as stipulated in the Milestone Schedule in the Project Manual. Contractor’s Name _________________________


TAXES: All subcontractors and suppliers will be required to pay sales and use tax on any items purchased for this project and shall be included in the above bid(s). ADDENDA If any addenda covering changes to the Bidding Documents have been received during the bid period, the bidder shall fill in their numbers and dates. This acknowledges that the Bidder has received same, and has included any affect on the work involved in this proposal.

___________________________________________ Dated _______________________ ___________________________________________ Dated _______________________ ___________________________________________ Dated _______________________ CLARIFICATION MEMOS If any clarification memos covering changes to the Bidding Documents have been received during the bid period, the bidder shall fill in their numbers and dates. This acknowledges that the Bidder has received same, and has included any affect on the work involved in this proposal.

___________________________________________ Dated _______________________ ___________________________________________ Dated _______________________ VOLUNTARY ALTERNATES

Voluntary Alternates / Owner’s Options are encouraged. However, all bids shall be in compliance with the Bid Documents. Voluntary Alternates shall not be included in a base bid amount. If the number of voluntary alternates exceeds the space allotted below, additional sheets may be included. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any Voluntary Alternate.

VA #1 Bid Category Written Description of Voluntary Alternate

_______ _____________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________ For the amount of: Add/Deduct ______________________________________ Dollars ADD/DEDUCT---$ ______________


ACCEPTANCE OF PROPOSAL: The undersigned agrees to execute a contract for Work, covered by this proposal, provided that he or she is notified of its acceptance, within sixty (60) days after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. The Undersigned hereby declares that he/she has the legal status checked below:

( ) Individual

( ) Partnership having the following partner(s): __________________________________________________________ . ( ) Corporation incorporated under the state laws of __________________________. This proposal is submitted in the name of and notice of acceptance should be mailed or delivered to: FIRM NAME ADDRESS _________________________________ CITY STATE ____________________________________ ZIP CODE BY TITLE (Signature) _____________________________________ (Printed Name) DATE PHONE ( )

FAX ( ) E-MAIL IN THE PRESENCE OF: TITLE If a corporation, affix Corporate Seal. Submit one original and two additional copies for a total of (3) three copies along with this and retain one copy for your file.

END OF PROPOSAL FORM

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 6100 – Bonds Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 6100 BONDS


Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section. PART 2 – BOND REQUIREMENTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE BONDS AND PAYMENT BONDS A. The Owner and Spence Brothers, at their discretion, may require the trade contractor to furnish

a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, with the amounts equal to the contract price, by a qualified surety. Premium cost for the bonds is to be quoted on the proposal form. All sureties providing bonds on this project must be listed in the Department of Treasury’s Circular 570, entitled “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” with the bond amount less than or equal to the underwriting limitation, and/or have an A.M. Best rating of B+ or better. Bonds shall be duly executed by the Trade Contractor, as principal, and by a surety that is licensed in the state in which the work is to be performed and is licensed by the State of Michigan Insurance Bureau.

B. The trade contractor shall deliver the required bonds to Spence Brothers prior to execution of

the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall submit evidence to the Construction Manager that such bonds will be furnished prior to commencement of the Work.

C. The obligee on the bond shall be “Spence Brothers.” D. The proposed bonding company of the bidder must be acceptable to the Owner and Spence

Brothers. If at any time, after acceptance of the trade contractor’s bond, the surety fails to meet the criteria stated in Paragraph 2.01A above, the contractor must, as a precondition to continuing work and receive further payments, replace the bond with a bond from a surety that meets the stated criteria.

2.02 BID BONDS A A Bid Security by a qualified surety authorized to do business in the State where the Project is

located and in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Base Bid shall accompany each proposal or proposal combination. The Bid Security may be in the form of a Bid Bond, Cashier’s Check, or Money Order. Personal checks are NOT acceptable. Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid date.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 6500 – Certificate of Insurance Page 1 of 3

SECTION 00 6500 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Certificate of Insurance.

B. Each Contractor shall provide, prior to beginning of Work, a certificate of insurance for delivery

to the Owner indicating that all required insurance coverage is in force. Refer to the “Risk Management” section of the “Additional Conditions for the Contract for Construction – Section 00 7300” for information regarding required coverage.

C. All stored material, regardless of it being stored-on-site or off-site, that is not yet incorporated

into the Project shall become the property of the Owner, but if such material is stolen, destroyed, or damaged by casualty before being used, the Contractor will be required to replace it at his own expense.

D. The property insurance purchased by the Owner shall be in the form and provide such coverage

as selected by the Owner. The Owner will make the policy available for inspection and copying by the Contractor. This insurance is intended to cover materials, machinery, tools and equipment that have been affixed or permanently installed on the project. The Contractor shall bear the entire risk of loss with respect to such material, machinery, tools, and equipment that have not been affixed or permanently installed on the project.

E. Use standard Insurance Certificate Form. The Accord Form 25 (2009/01) or 25-S (2009/01) are

preferable forms. These forms should be obtained from your Insurance agent. F. Issue all certificates to: Essexville Hampton Public Schools, 303 Pine Street, Essexville,

Michigan 48732. G. Certificates must show as ‘additional insured’ the Owner, Essexville Hampton Public Schools,

the Architect, KL Design Group, LLC, and the Construction Manager, Spence Brothers. H. A “Letter of Compliance” must be completed and submitted along with the certificate of

insurance. The “Letter of Compliance” form is Page 3 of this section. I. An example of how Insurance certificates must be completed is as follows: (please refer to

corresponding numerals on the sample certificate (following instructions) and also reference 00 5000 Agreement Form and 007000 General Conditions of the Contract.

1. This blank is to be dated the date the certificate of insurance is issued. 2. This blank is to provide the complete name and address of the insurance agency issuing

the certificate.


3. This blank is to provide the full name and address of the “prime contractor.” 4. These blanks are to provide the name (or names) of the insurance company(ies) providing

coverage for the specific coverage issued on the certificate. 5. General Liability

a. General Liability – All blanks must be checked in this section and policies must be on an “occurrence” basis.

b. Policy Number – A policy number must be listed here. c. Policy “effective” and “expiration” dates must be listed in these two blanks. d. This section must be filled in with dollar amounts (listed in thousands). Please refer

to the example on the following page. 6. Automobile liability

a. These blanks must be filled in with either: Option 1: Any Auto, Hired, and Non-Owned automobiles OR Option 2: All Owned Autos (Priv. Pass.), All Owned Autos (Other than Priv. Pass.), Hired Autos, and Non-Owned Autos.

b. Policy Number – A policy number must be listed here. c. Policy Effective and Expiration dates must be listed in these two blanks. d. This Section must be filled in with dollar amounts (in thousands).

7. Excess Liability (Provide $2 million Excess Liability Umbrella policy): a. This blank must be checked with the “Umbrella Form.” b. Policy Number – A policy number must be listed here. c. Policy Effective and Expiration dates must be listed in these blanks. d. If this section is required (see Item 7 above), both of these blanks must be filled in

with a minimum of $2,000,000 and $2,000,000. 8. Worker’s Compensation

a. Nothing needs to be checked here. b. Policy Number – A policy number must be listed here. c. Policy Effective and Expiration dates must be listed in these blanks. d. These blanks must be filled in with minimum limits as follows:

$500,000 (each accident) $500,000 (disease policy limits) $500,000 (disease each employee)

9. This section need not be completed unless some unique coverage is required for a certain type of job.

10. This section should contain the listing of the additional insured as in 1.01D. The names of the Owner, Architect, and Construction Manager including Products and Completed Operations using ISO’s (CG 20 10 11/85) or a combination of ISO’s Scheduled Ongoing Operations (CG 20 10 10/01) and Scheduled Completed Operations (CG 20 37 10/01) or the equivalent must be listed here.

11. The Owner should be listed here, as this is the actual Certificate Holder. List the Owner as follows: Essexville Hampton Public Schools

12. This blank must show the number thirty (30), indicating that the Owner and all additional insured parties will receive at least thirty (30) days notice of cancellation of any of the policies listed on the certificate.

13. The certificate must be signed by a licensed insurance agent or representative of the insurance company in order to be valid.


NOTE: Sample Certificate of Liability

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 7000 – General Conditions of the Contract Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 7000 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Related Documents

A. Attention is directed to Division 0, Bidding and Contract Requirements, and to

Division 1, General Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section.

B. Specific attention is directed to the requirements described in Section 00 5000 Agreement Form (Contract).

1.02 General Conditions of the Contract

A. AIA Document A201 – 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction is a part of the Contract Documents.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 00 7319 – Safety Requirements Page 1 of 8

SECTION 00 7319 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS


Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section describes the on-site project safety requirements including: 1. Trade Contractor’s Contract Requirements for Safety 2. On-Site Safety and Loss Control Program Content 3. Project Safety Guide 4. Safety Related Forms 1.03 CONTRACTOR’S CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS FOR SAFETY A. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor is responsible for their own Safety Program in

accordance with applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act; and shall, in addition, adopt the Project Safety Program for work on this project. Every Trade Contractor and Subcontractor shall comply with all applicable local, state and federal Safety and Health Regulations. In addition, each Trade Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all fines and/or claims levied against the Owner, Architect, or Spence Brothers for deficiencies relating to conduct of the Trade Contractor’s work.

B. As a Trade Contractor and employer you are required by Federal and State Occupational

Safety and Health Regulations, Standards, Codes, Rules, and Regulations in addition to Contract Rules and Regulations to provide protection for our customer’s employees, the construction tradespeople and the public who could come into contact with your operations.

C. The Spence Brothers’ Safety Program contained in this section is included as part of the

contract documents and shall be the minimum safety requirements by all Trade Contractors and Subcontractors working on the project. In addition, each Trade Contractor shall sign and return the Safety Agreement Form that is included in Spence Brothers’ Safety Program.

D. The information contained within the Spence Brothers’ Safety Program in no way relieves

Trade Contractors or Subcontractors or Suppliers of their lawful or contractual responsibilities and obligations for safety. Suppliers and/or Subcontractors should seek professional guidance (legal/safety) in developing their own safety rules and programs.

E. Each Trade Contractor shall submit to Spence Brothers the information listed in Item 2.02.B.2

before starting any work on the project. F. The Trade Contractor understands and agrees not to use or incorporate hazardous materials in

the work and will comply with the Owner’s hazard communication program and obtain material data sheets (MSDS) as appropriate. Trade Contractor will provide, in a binder, their


Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each hazardous material to the Central location provided by Spence Brothers and have a copy of same available for employees.

PART 2 – ON-SITE PROJECT SAFETY AND LOSS CONTROL PROGRAM CONTENT 2.02 INTRODUCTION A. Spence Brothers recognizes that it is important to our successful operation to prevent the

occurrence of incidents that lead to occupational injuries or illnesses. We must all be committed to the performance of our duties in a safe manner, consistent with good construction practices.

B. Accidents occur because of unsafe acts by people or unsafe conditions within the work area.

The objective of this Safety and Loss Control Program is to eliminate and/or control these two basic accident causes.

C. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor is responsible for the safety and loss control of

employees and work areas under their control. Spence Brothers demands that OSHA regulations be observed and maintained as a minimum standard in all cases. Safety should never be sacrificed for production.

D. Spence Brothers seeks your cooperation in providing a safe place to work for all employees.

We believe that safety is a fundamental part of our jobs and a fundamental part of an efficient and profitable production. Prevention of accidents is positive thinking.

2.02 RESPONSIBILITIES A. GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES 1. All work shall be conducted in a safe and practical manner in conformance with the

Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1974, OSHA Safety and Health Regulations.

B. CONTRACTORS 1. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor will be responsible for the safety and loss

control of employees and area of work under their control. 2. Each Trade Contractor shall submit the following information to Spence Brothers for

approval prior to commencement of the work: a. An executed safety agreement b. The Trade Contractor’s written, specific Site Safety Program applying the

contractors safety. c. The Trade Contractor’s written Hazard Communication Program. d. The names of persons or entities proposed as first tier subcontractors.


f. Resumes of proposed field supervisor and site safety representative. g. Trade Contractor’s written substance abuse policy/program 3. The Trade Contractor will maintain and provide to Spence Brothers written records of the Following, if requested: Document Needed Equipment Safety Inspection Report Before Use of Equipment (for 8 ton and larger lift cranes) Respirator Procedures Before Start of this Work Confined Space Procedures Before Start of this Work OSHA Injury Log (Form 300A) Monthly Accident Reports Within 24 hours of occurrence Tool Box Safety Meetings/Self-Inspections Weekly 4. Each Trade Contractor may be requested to provide the Owner and/or Spence Brothers

with monthly statistics concerning jobsite man-hours (by trade and those involving overtime), accident and severity information. This information will be submitted with the trade contractor’s monthly payment application. Failure to provide this information may disallow payment.

5. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor shall conduct work in a safe and practical

manner in conformance with the Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1974 and the OSHA Safety and Health Regulations.

6. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor shall observe all applicable federal, state and

local laws and regulations pertaining to safety and health, pollution control, water supply, fire protection, sanitation facilities, waste disposal, and other related items.

7. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor shall cooperate fully with all other trade

contractors in their respective safety and health programs. 8. The Trade Contractor or Subcontractor shall furnish all reasonable information

concerning the safety of their operations on the project as may be required by Spence Brothers.

9. The Trade Contractor shall notify Spence Brothers immediately of all injuries requiring

clinical attention, or property damage estimated in excess of $1,000.00.

10. The Trade Contractor will assign an individual to act as Safety Representative* who will have the responsibility of resolving safety matters, and act as a liaison among the Trade Contractors, Spence Brothers and the Owner. This individual must be on site and have the authority necessary to immediately correct unsafe practices or hazardous conditions. This representative or an alternate is also required to attend periodic safety meetings as directed by Spence Brothers.


*The Safety Representative must be a competent person, with a minimum of 30 hours of MIOSHA training, and who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in surroundings that are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to employees, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.

11. All Trade Contractors will give full cooperation to the Owner’s and Spence Brothers’

representatives, who may periodically visit the project. 12. The Trade Contractors will inform Spence Brothers of any federal or state inspection

prior to the site tour. Spence Brothers will receive copies of all federal and state inspection reports, citations, penalties, abatement dates, etc.

13. Trade Contractors or their employees or agents involved in unsafe acts or conditions may

be directed to cease that activity until the condition is brought into compliance with the site safety procedures. These costs will be borne by the non-complying trade Contractor, and no costs will be charged to the Owner or Spence Brothers. In addition, if a Trade Contractor or Subcontractor refused to correct unsafe conditions, Spence Brothers may correct the situation by using other employees and back charging the Trade Contractor or Subcontractor for expenses incurred. Trade Contractors or their Subcontractors’ non-complying employees may be prohibited from working on the site at the sole discretion of Spence Brothers, without recourse.

14. Failure to comply with the contract safety requirements will be considered as non-

compliance with the contract, and may result in remedial action including withholding of payment of any sums due the Trade Contractor.

15. Additional Contract Safety Requirements a. All projects are hard hat jobs unless specifically designated as “not requiring hard

hats” by the Director of Safety and Loss Control. All supervisors, employees and visitors shall be required to wear an approved hard hat while on the site of a hard hat job.

b. It will be the responsibility of each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor to ensure that

all employees wear durable work boots. Under no conditions, shall tennis shoes or sandals be allowed. Other appropriate personal protective equipment shall be provided and worn as required.

c. Good housekeeping shall be observed at all times. Waste, debris and garbage shall

be removed daily, or placed in appropriate waste containers. All materials, tools and equipment shall be stored in a safe and orderly fashion.

d. Each Trade Contractor or Subcontractor will supply the proper equipment, take the

necessary precautions to maintain the equipment according to current regulations and specifications, and accept responsibility to ensure that the necessary safety equipment is supplied and used when required.

e. Each Trade Contractor and Subcontractor will be responsible for supplying,

maintaining and inspecting all fire extinguishers in their office, storage and refueling


areas. In the event a fire extinguisher is discharged or damaged, it shall be removed from service and replaced with a charged unit.

16. Hazardous Materials a. Each Trade Contractor will be responsible for having all materials labeled as to their

content. Material Safety Data Sheets are to be provided by the Trade Contractor in a binder to the central location(s), and must be available for all hazardous materials. The central location(s) will be defined by Spence Brothers at the beginning of the project. Hazardous materials must be stored and used in accordance with the Material Safety Data Sheets. All hazardous wastes are to be disposed in accordance with federal, state and local regulations.

17. Safety Orientation for Contractor Supervision a. All Trade Contractors and Subcontractors shall have their site supervisor and/or

safety representative at the preconstruction safety meeting to review and agree to the following:

Safety procedures at the project Safety orientation and meetings for all trades (schedule and methods to be used) Record keeping requirements for inspections, violations, and variances Employee complaint and discipline Accident report and emergency procedures Sanitation and water supply system Tagging and lockout system procedures b. This meeting will be documented and signed by the representative of each company

present. C. TRADE CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL

1. All Trade Contractor personnel are to know the safety rules listed in the Safety Program.

If a tradesperson does not understand the rules, he or she should ask his or her foreman or supervisor for help. Each tradesperson is responsible for following these rules without exception.

2. Tradespeople are to report any unsafe act or condition immediately to their foreman or

supervisor. If the act or condition can be easily corrected, the tradesperson should make the correction.

3. Tradespeople should attend all required safety meetings. 4. Tradespeople should report all work related injuries and illnesses to their supervisor

immediately. 5. Never sacrifice safety for production. Proper construction technique and good common

sense will prevent most accidents.


D. SPENCE BROTHERS 1. Spence Brothers does not assume the safety nor does not assume the safety responsibilities

of the Contractors as set forth under MIOSHA Regulations. 2. Each employer has a general duty to furnish each employee with a place of employment

free from recognized hazards causing, or likely to cause death or serious physical harm. 3. Spence Brothers will act as a consultant to assist the Trade Contractors in meeting the

minimum basic standards as set forth by MIOSHA and the Project Safety Program. 4. Safety Hazard Notifications shall be issued to the trade contractor when an unsafe act or

condition is reported or observed. Spence Brothers will not supervise the abatement or associated reprimand of unsafe acts or conditions within a Trade Contractor’s scope of work.

5. Coordination between Trade Contractors on safety related items or disputes will be at the

discretion of Spence Brothers. 2.03 PROCEDURES A. HAZARD ABATEMENT 1. The following sequence of actions should be taken in the event of unsafe acts or

conditions on the job site. The order of action is suggested, but not necessary, if the situation requires immediate abatement to avoid an accident. Sound judgment must be exercised in dealing with potential problems as opposed to imminent dangers.

2. Unsafe Acts & Conditions If unsafe acts or conditions are observed within a Trade Contractor’s area of control, the

Trade Contractor’s supervisor in charge of the area is to be contacted. If corrective action is taken immediately, the matter will be noted in the Superintendent’s Daily Report. If corrective action is not taken immediately by the supervisor in charge, the Trade Contractor’s management will be issued a Safety Hazard Notification.

3. Safety Hazard Notification If immediate action is not taken or a dispute over the hazard develops, a Safety Hazard

Notification will be issued. This form will be specific in noting the acts or conditions that do not meet minimum standards for safety and health. The Trade Contractor should take immediate steps to correct the hazard(s). Corrective action taken by the Trade Contractor shall be noted on the Safety Hazard Notification Form, and the form returned to Spence Brothers to avoid remedial action.

4. Remedial Action If corrective action is not taken, a letter or telegram is to be sent to the Trade Contractor’s

Chief Executive Officer requesting immediate attention. The letter or telegram will outline remedial action to be taken by Spence Brothers, if corrections are not made. Note


that all costs will be charged to the Trade Contractor, and any action taken by Spence Brothers will not relieve the Trade Contractor of responsibility for safety.

B. ACCIDENT MANAGEMENT 1. First Aid Treatment The Trade Contractor shall have standard emergency procedures to deal with the

immediate removal and treatment, if necessary, of any employee who may be injured or become ill. The Trade Contractor shall keep on the job a first-aid kit supplied according to current regulations, and shall have a person trained in first aid.

2. Accident Reports Personnel If an employee of a Trade Contractor is injured and requires treatment at a clinic, the

contractor shall provide Spence Brothers with a written report of the occurrence. Severe Injuries or Accidents The Trade Contractor shall notify Spence Brothers immediately of any severe injury or

accident in which one or more persons may be hospitalized, or property damage is estimated in excess of $1,000.00.

3. Loss Incident Reports Any incident involving a Trade Contractor and/or the public property or vehicle of another

must be reported within 24 hours. C. PERSONNEL SAFETY ORIENTATION 1. Each Trade Contractor shall comply with OSHA Regulation 1926.21(2), which states that

the employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to the work environment.

D. TOOL BOX SAFETY MEETING 1. The Trade Contractors shall hold weekly Tool Box safety meetings for all of their

employees. All trades personnel are required to attend these weekly training sessions. These sessions must be documented on the Weekly Tool Box Talk forms and returned to Spence Brothers on a weekly basis. These are required, and monies will be withheld until they are on file. Alternate forms must be approved by Spence Brothers.

2. Self Inspection To provide current and effective safety information, a self-inspection of the Trade

Contractor’s area of control should be performed prior to the Tool Box Talk meeting. The Trade Contractor’s safety representative or supervisor should tour the area, noting safety


problems or deficiencies on the Tool Box Talk form. Dates for action taken on the deficiencies must be set prior to submittal to Spence Brothers.

3. Tool Box Meeting When utilizing the Tool Box Talk form, the Trade Contractor should note the meeting

date, leader and topics discussed, in addition to signatures of all employees in attendance. Five minutes is the optimum time for the meeting. The tone of all safety discussions should be serious and purposeful.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 1000 – Summary Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 1000 SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Essexville Hampton Public Schools Bid Package 1 Project Location: Bush Elementary, Cramer Junior High, Garber High and Verellen Elementary Schools in Essexville, Michigan Owner: Essexville Hampton Public Schools 303 Pine Street Essexville, Michigan

B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated April 2015, were prepared for the

project by K L Design Group, LLC. Their address is 726 Abbot Road, East Lansing, Michigan 48823.

C. Construction Manager Identification: Spence Brothers is the Construction Manager. Matthew Spence is the Project Manager; his email is [email protected] and the address is 417 McCoskry Street, Saginaw, Michigan 48601. Phone: 989-752-0400 and Fax: 989-752-8769.

E. Scope of Work: (See Section 00 2213 – Work Scopes)

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Trade Contractors will have limited use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Owner’s right to perform work or to limit trade contractor’s use of premises. Spence Brothers will allocate available laydown construction space as they deem necessary.

1.4 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Separate Contract: Owner will award separate contracts for performance of certain construction operations at the Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 1000 – Summary Page 2 of 2

1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 40-division format and CSI/CSC's "Master-Format" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred, as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Trade Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Trade Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.6 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 1400 – Work Restrictions Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 1400 WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to scope of work areas and construction staging areas.

2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public.

3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

C. Use of Construction Area: Spence Brothers will allocate and distribute areas for laydown and trailer setup, as they deem necessary. Trade Contractors must coordinate all material deliveries with Spence Brothers.

1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before

Owner occupancy.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 1400 – Work Restrictions Page 2 of 2

2. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.




Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2600 – Contract Mod. Procedures Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 2600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.

2. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Spence Brothers from the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.


b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Spence Brothers and Trade Contractor (through Spence Brothers) may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Substitutions" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.5 ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance.

2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed.

3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances.

4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Trade Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has


changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.

2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher or lower priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Spence Brothers on AIA Document G701.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.




Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2900 – Payment Procedures Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01 2900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of CM’s Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule.

2. All Trade Contractor’s shall submit their Schedule of Values to Spence Brothers, Spence Brothers will collaborate and submit to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.


B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Construction Manager/Constructor c. Name of Architect. d. Architect's project number. e. Trade Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

4. Separate material and labor costs for each line item.

5. If the project consists of phased construction, and/or the building is broken up in to several definable areas of construction as indicated on the architectural drawings, indicate separate line items for each. Separate site work building work etc.

6. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not a direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.


8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the first day of the month and ends on the last day of the month. Draft pay applications shall be submitted by the 20th of each month with the final signed copy submitted by the 25th of each month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: When submitting to Spence Brothers, complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Trade Contractor. Spence Brothers will forward complete copies to the Architect or will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Spence Brothers’ Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Spence Brothers (to collaborate and submit to the architect) by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.

2. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

3. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.


4. Submit documentation of the amount of work hours performed by their forces. This information shall be submitted along with monthly pay applications.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Trade Contractor’s Construction Schedule 4. Products list. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Trade Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Trade Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction

for performance of the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds (if required). 12. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 13. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 14. Indicate 2% of their contract amount, as a line item, on their schedule of values, as

“Clean Up”. 15. Indicate 3% of contract amount, as a line item, on their schedule of values, as “Punch

List”.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required

and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled.


8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2977 – Sworn Statements & Waivers Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 2977 SWORN STATEMENTS AND WAIVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for sworn statement, partial and full waivers:

1.3 SWORN STATEMENT

A. Sworn Statement shall be included with each Application for Payment.

B. A sample Sworn Statement follows.

C. Sworn Statement shall contain all necessary Project information, including:

1. Date of Sworn Statement. 2. County in which the deponent is at the time of the completion of the Sworn Statement. 3. Deponent name. 4. Contractor name on whose behalf the deponent is making statement. 5. County in which the Project is situated. 6. Project name and site location. 7. Deponent signature and typewritten name. 8. Notary name, signature, and commission expiration date. 9. Project name and site location. 10. Subcontractor/Supplier listings as submitted for approval at the beginning of the Project. 11. Description of work to be completed by each subcontractor/supplier. 12. Total contract amount for each subcontractor/supplier. 13. Listings of amounts paid, amounts owing, retentions held, and balances to complete.

1.4 WAIVERS

A. Applications for Payment must be accompanied by a Sworn Statement and applicable waivers. Partial and full waivers will be provided prior to release of contractor payment.

B. A sample “partial” waiver follows. B. A sample “full” waiver follows.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2977 – Sworn Statements & Waivers Page 2 of 2

1.5 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT

A. No payment will be issued from the Construction Manager for any progress payment when the substantiating sworn statement and lien waiver(s) from the previous payment have not been received by the Construction Manager.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

PART 3 - EXECUTION


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2979 – Partial Waiver Sample Page 1 of 1

PARTIAL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER

Our contract with Spence Brothers to provide labor and materials for the

___________________________________Project (hereinafter the “Project” and/or

the “Property”) and hereby waive, release and discharge all our rights,

claims, and causes of action however so characterized against Spence

Brothers, its Surety (if any) and the Project Owner and any and all payment

bonds for the Project (if any), and/or construction lien rights against the

Property to the amount of $_____________ for labor and materials provided

through _________________, 20___.

This waiver, together with all previous waivers, if any, does cover all

amounts due to me for contract improvements provided through the date shown

above.

We represent that our and/or any of our sub-tier subcontractors, laborers,

labor unions, fringe funds and/or suppliers have been paid in full through

the date shown above.

___________________________ (Contractor) Date: __________________________ ________________________________ (Signature)

Address: ________________________________

_________________________________

Phone: ________________________________

Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______ day of _________________, ________. Notary Public: ________________________________

_________________ County, ____________________

My Commission Expires: ________________________

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 2980 – Full Waiver Sample Page 1 of 1

FULL UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER

Our contract with Spence Brothers to provide labor and materials for the

_____________________________________________ Project (hereinafter the “Project”

and/or the “Property”) having been fully paid and satisfied, all our rights, claims,

and causes of action however so characterized against Spence Brothers, its Surety (if

any) and the Project Owner and any and all payment bonds for the Project (if any)

and/or construction lien rights against the Property are hereby waived, released, and

discharged. We represent that our and/or any of our sub-tier subcontractors,

laborers, labor unions, fringe funds and/or suppliers have been paid in full.

[insert full company name]

Dated: _________________ [insert address]

By:

Subscribed and Sworn to before me this ______ day of ____________________, ________. Notary Public: ________________________________ _________________ County, ____________________

My Commission Expires: ________________________

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3113– Coordination Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 3113 COORDINATION OF PROJECT

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUPERVISION A. Each Trade Contractor shall provide competent office management and field personnel as

required for proper performance of the work. These personnel shall be experienced in the administration, coordination and supervision of the Trade Contractor’s scope of work and how it relates to all other Trade Contractor’s work. The Trade Contractor’s supervision shall be acceptable to the project Team, and shall maintain order and discipline among the trades people at all times. They shall attend meetings as required and be authorized to act on and make decisions and commitments on behalf of the Trade Contractor.

B. The Trade Contractor shall supervise and direct the work, using the Trade Contractor’s best skill

and attention. The Trade Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and shall coordinate all portions of the work under the Trade Contractor’s scope of work, subject to the overall coordination of Spence Brothers.

C. The Trade Contractor has the responsibility to ensure that all product suppliers, subcontractors,

etc. adhere to the Contract Documents, order material on time, taking into account the current market, delivery and manpower conditions and provide products on time. The Trade Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of all others on the Project, including deliveries, storage, installations and construction utilities. The Trade Contractor shall be responsible for the space requirements, locations and routing of his equipment. In areas and locations where the proper and most effective space requirements, locations and routing cannot be made as indicated, the Trade Contractor shall notify Spence Brothers and meet with all others involved, before installation, to plan the most effective and efficient method of overall installation, access and performance.

D. The Trade Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner and Spence Brothers for acts and

omissions of the Trade Contractor’s employees, subcontractors, and other persons performing portions of the work under a contract with the Trade Contractor, until the final acceptance of the Work by Spence Brothers and the Owner.

1.03 COORDINATION OF WORK/COOPERATION A. Each Trade Contractor shall recognize the complex nature of the project, the sequential

nature of contracts and the concurrent and ongoing operations of the Owner and other Trade Contractors with the work under this project. All Trade Contractors are required to review, discuss and coordinate their work with the work of other Trade Contractors as well as Spence Brothers with regard to sequence, timing, built-in work and equipment, layout, location, compatibility of materials and sizes and required clearances prior to beginning the work to

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3113– Coordination Page 2 of 2

avoid construction delays which impact the Owner’s occupancy of the facility. Since the work of changes in the scheduling, procedures, work or job conditions of a Trade Contractor may affect the scheduling procedures, work or job conditions of other Trade Contractors.

B. Each Trade Contractor shall coordinate construction operations in various sections of the technical specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, fit and operation.

1. Schedule operation in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of

one part of the work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with the owner’s representative to assure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Provide to all other trades all information (drawings, diagrams, templates, embedments, etc.)

necessary for the coordination of the work.

C. The completion of the building within the prescribed time is dependent upon the close and active cooperation and open discussions of all those involved, therefore, it is expressly understood and agreed that each Trade Contractor shall layout and install their work at such time and in such manner as not to delay or interfere with the carrying forward of the work of other Trade Contractors. Observation of the work by others shall not be interpreted as relieving a Trade Contractor from their responsibility for coordination, supervision, or scheduling and direction of the work.

D. Trade Contractors are to report in a prompt manner any interferences, discrepancies or

incompatibilities discovered to Spence Brothers, whose decision as to the party or parties at fault and as to the manner in which the matter may be resolved, shall be binding and conclusive on all parties. Spence Brothers may direct layout/location changes as required to make the entire work fit together. Minor changes of this nature will not be considered for increase in contract amount.

E. Failure of a Trade Contractor to notify other Trade Contractors and Spence Brothers of a

potential interference, incompatibility, or discrepancy and failure to coordinate their work with that of other Trade Contractors prior to installation and/or fabrication may be considered as sufficient cause to deny consideration for additional payment for what otherwise may be considered a change.

F. Due to the nature of the Owner’s existing areas, the sequence of work must be scheduled and

coordinated with the Owner’s ongoing operations to minimize disruptions and/or disturbances to the Owner’s work and at all times shall remain as secondary to the Owner’s work. Each segment of the work shall be coordinated with Spence Brothers prior to proceeding.

G. All work is to comply with the rules and regulations of governing bodies having jurisdiction

including federal, state and local codes. Work shall be performed by skilled tradesmen having experience in performing the work.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3114 – Coordination Drawings Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 3114 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Trade Contractors required by their work scopes shall be responsible for developing CAD coordination drawings and participating in coordination meetings as defined herein and shall have included the cost for such work in their bids.

B. Coordination drawings shall be utilized to establish installation sequence, resolve trade

coordination issues prior to installation and to make the most efficient use of space allocated for systems such as mechanical, electrical, and plumbing installations without sacrifice to systems performance. This is also required to determine inter-relationships and possible interferences between all of the trades’ work and the Architectural or Structural features.

C. Trade Contractors are required to attend coordination meetings as required by Spence

Brothers. The representative(s) from each trade is required to be familiar with the work and have the expertise and authority to answer questions and make decisions and changes to their systems at these meetings.

D. Representative(s) from the Architect having the expertise and authority to answer questions,

and make decisions and changes with respect to systems design will be present or available via telephone, at various coordination meetings.

E. The coordination drawings may also be used by the Trade Contractor as part of his required

shop drawing and as-built drawing submittals. F. Each Bidder should anticipate that each area may require several meetings. However, in the

interest of time, multiple areas may be reviewed in one meeting. Development of the coordination drawings will be by area with order of priority established by Spence Brothers.

1.03 COORDINATION DRAWING PROCESS

A. When requested by Spence Brothers after the award of the contracts, the Architect will furnish to Spence Brothers electronic media files of the project. The Architect may request receipt of a signed Release of Electronic Media Records form and/or an Architect’s fee. The HVAC Contractor, following a coordination kick-off meeting, shall immediately begin work creating the coordination drawings to be used by all parties involved in coordination. All structural steel, walls, floors, ceilings, door openings, etc. shall be drawn. The drawing will be distributed to all MEP parties for their use in drawing their material. The drawing shall also show registers, grilles, diffusers, and similar features. Include locations of all valves, dampers and noting any items requiring access for service and maintenance as well as access


doors in inaccessible ceilings. Coordination drawing shall also show the size, layout and routing of all metal and flex ductwork, re-heat coils, terminal units, filters, and major hangers and supports. Provide notation for diffuser boot sizes and heights and any other special features. Where piping or ductwork has external insulation, note or show locations and thickness.

B. Once all trades have developed their drawings, all information shall be transmitted to HVAC

contractor for use by the lead coordinator. C. A coordination meeting will be held to review interferences and discussion will be had

regarding interferences and decisions will be made with regards to how each interference will be eliminated. If RFIs are developed during the coordination meeting, a log will be kept and appropriate RFIs will be submitted to the A/E for response.

D. Each individual contractor shall incorporate the changes made during the coordination

meeting into their individual drawings. Once all changes have been made by all MEP trades, another coordination meeting shall be held and the process is repeated until there are no more interferences.

E. Information for specific trades is required but not limited to the following:

1. Domestic and HVAC Piping – Size, layout and routing of piping, valves, boxes, supports, etc., for all piping 2” and larger, except for pitched piping. All pitched piping shall be modeled regardless of size. Show or note all pipe sizes and working clearances around valves, etc. For pitched piping, identify bottom elevations at key points and at least every column line. Note thickness and location of all external insulation. Bottom elevations shall be measured to the lowest point including hangers and insulation where applicable.

2. Sprinkler Piping – Size, layout and routing of mains and branch piping, hanger and

supports, valves, working clearances, and bottom of pipe and bottom of hangers support elevations. Sprinkler head locations shall be shown on ceiling plans. For pitched piping, identify bottom elevation at key points and at least at every column line.

3. Electrical – Size, layout and routing and size of conduit and wire 2” or larger for

normal and emergency power distribution systems, 1-1/2” or larger for communication systems telephone, nurse call, physiological monitoring, etc., include all systems specified, boxes larger than four inches in any dimension, hangers, supports, and electrical fixtures including lights, speakers, detectors, sensors, cable trays, raceways, etc. Size and clearance of ceiling and above ceiling mounted items shall be noted as a depth from finished ceiling to top of fixture or top of clear area required. Provide bottom elevations of conduits and equipment. Bottom elevation shall be measured from the lowest point, including hangers. Within four (4) feet of all panels, or areas where more than 4 conduits, regardless of size, are routed or grouped together, identify an easement or right-of-way for the groups of conduit.

F. Once the there are no more interferences, all MEP contractors shall sign off on the drawings

indicating their acceptance of the locations of all items. The HVAC contractor shall distribute print copies of the layouts to all MEP contractors and the Construction Manager for their use in construction.


1.04 EXECUTION A. After completion of the final coordination drawings, minor changes in duct, pipe, or conduit

routings that do not affect the intended function may be made as required to avoid space conflicts, when mutually agreed to by all parties involved. However, items may not be re-sized or exposed items relocated without Spence Brother’s written approval. No changes shall be made by Trade Contractors in any wall or chase locations, ceiling heights, door swings or locations, windows or other openings, or other features affecting the function or aesthetic effect of the building. If conflicts or interferences cannot be satisfactorily resolved, Contractors shall notify Spence Brothers who will, in turn, obtain a decision from the Architect/Engineer.

C. Record copies of final drawings shall be retained by Spence Brothers and each Trade

Contractor as working reference. All shop drawings, prior to their submittal to Spence Brothers shall be compared with the final drawings and developed accordingly by the Trade Contractor responsible. Any revision to the drawings which may become necessary during the progress of the work shall be noted to and by all Trade Contractors and shall be neatly and accurately recorded on the record copies. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the up-to-date maintenance of his own record copies of the final drawings, and any subsequent changes thereto shall be utilized by Spence Brothers and each Trade Contractor in the development of As-Built/Record drawings.

D. The coordination drawings need not be submitted as a whole, but they shall be submitted in

all cases per Spence Brothers’ schedule and in ample time to avoid construction delays. The coordination drawings of all trades may lack complete data in certain instances pending receipt of shop drawings, but sufficient space shall be allotted for the affected items. When final information is received, such data shall be promptly inserted into the model.

F. No extra compensation will be paid for relocating any duct, pipe, conduit, or other material

that has been installed without proper coordination between all Trade Contractors involved. If any improperly coordinated work, or work installed that is not in accordance with the approved coordinated drawings, necessitates additional work by the other Trade Contractors, the costs of all such additional work shall be solely borne by the Trade Contractor responsible. Extra compensation shall also not be given for rework associated with conflicts between items not drawn due to size and drawn items.

G. All changes in the Scope of Work due to revisions formally issued and approved shall be

shown on that trade’s final drawings and thoroughly coordinated with the other trades. I. In general and before the first coordination meeting the following guidelines shall be

followed:

1. All trades shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor for the size, height and clearance requirements for recessed or semi-recessed light fixtures, recessed speakers/detectors, and other electrical ceiling devices.

2. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in the center of lay-in ceiling tiles unless approved shop

drawings note otherwise.

3. All elevations shall be based on height above finished floor using established benchmarks.


4. Standard suspended ceiling systems require 3” minimum clearance for materials and

installation. 5. All MEP items above the ceiling shall be drawn and fully coordinated by the Trade

Contractors.

6. All trades to hang work as high as possible in above ceiling areas, allowing access to equipment for maintenance, repairs, connections, filters and removal without demolition of other work.

7. Floor to deck access space shall be drawn at the location of all items requiring service

access. The space shall be a minimum of three feet by three feet.

J. Coordination drawings submitted during this process are not considered shop drawing submittals. The coordination drawings may be part of the required shop drawing submittal, but are made separate from the distribution specified in this section.

K. All materials that are drawn and coordinated shall be given priority when it comes to

installation. All conduit and piping that is not drawn, due to size, shall be installed and routed so as to not conflict with the coordinated materials.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3119 – Project Mgmt & Meetings Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 3119 PROJECT MANAGEMENT & MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for Project Meetings on the Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 2. Project meetings.

B. Each trade contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific trade contractor.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 1 Section “Coordination Drawings” for information regarding the coordination meetings required.

4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other trade contractors.


1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Spence Brothers will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Spence Brothers will schedule a preconstruction conference for all trade contractors before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. The conference will be at Project site or another convenient location. The meeting will review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, Spence Brothers, and their consultants; Trade Contractors and their superintendents; subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. l. Parking availability. m. Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Safety Requirements q. Coordination Issues with the Owner’s operations r. Security. s. Progress cleaning. t. Working hours.


C. Preinstallation Conferences: Spence Brothers will conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction, as deemed necessary by Spence Brothers, the Architect or the Owner.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. u. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Spence Brothers will record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.

4. Installation will not begin if the conference cannot be successfully concluded, unless direction is given by Spence Brothers. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Spence Brothers will conduct progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals or as determined necessary by Spence Brothers. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, and Spence Brothers, each trade contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.


2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Spence Brothers’ Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to the Baseline Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Reporting: Spence Brothers will distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Scheduling Meetings: Spence Brothers will conduct an initial scheduling meeting to collaborate the trade contractors’ construction schedules into the Milestone schedule. Other scheduling meetings may be required to review, update, and revise the overall construction schedule throughout the remainder of the project.




Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3200 –Progress Documentation Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01 3200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Trade Contractor’s Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily Construction Reports 4. Material Location Reports 5. Field Condition Reports 6. Special reports.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Meetings" for submitting and distributing

meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be started.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.


E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Trade Contractors, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

F. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

G. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

H. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

I. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit one printed copy of initial schedule, large enough to show the entire bid category schedule. Also submit the following

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using Microsoft Project on labeled CDs to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.

B. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Meeting: Spence Brothers will conduct a meeting at the Project prior to work beginning. The meeting will review methods and procedures related to the Milestone Construction Schedule and each Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones,

and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 5. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 6. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 7. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 8. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 9. Review submittal requirements and procedures.

10. Review procedures for updating schedule.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRADE CONTRACTOR’S SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

2.2 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." Trade Contractors Schedules must show how the trade contractor will complete their Bid Category as outlined in the Milestone Schedule.

B. Activities: Treat each phase of work or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 14 days, unless specifically allowed by Spence Brothers.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittals" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule with Trade Contractor’s Submittals Schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.


6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Bid Category, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

7. Milestones: Include the Milestone Schedule in the Trade Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2.3 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. Base schedule on the Milestone Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Spence Brothers will produce daily Construction Reports: Daily construction reports will record the following types of information concerning events at the Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings.

10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Change Orders received and implemented. 13. Construction Change Directives received. 14. Services connected and disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups.


16. Partial Completions and occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: Trade Contractors will produce and distribute to Spence Brothers, at monthly intervals, a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.

C. Field Condition Reports: Trade Contractors will immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report for Spence Brothers. The report will be submitted on a Request for Information (RFI). Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Spence Brothers within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Trade Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Spence Brothers in advance when these events are known or predictable.



Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 3300 – Submittals Page 1 of 9

SECTION 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Coordination Drawings" for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and

Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mockups. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record

Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect’s approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Trade Contractor's for use in preparing submittals and shop drawings with a signed Release of Electronic Media Records form and an Architect’s fee.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.


a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Spence Brothers when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal.

a. Color and finish materials, selections, mechanical and electrical equipment.

3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record

Spence Brothers’ review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Bid Category No. ___ d. Name and address of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. f. Name and address of subcontractor. g. Name and address of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Unique identifier, including revision number. j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.


1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Contractor shall complete in its entirety the Spence Brothers transmittal form. All contractor required items must be completed prior to submission. The transmittal shall be the first page of the submittal. Only one specification should be included on each transmittal

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit all action submittals electronically to Spence Brothers with the required transmittal.

2. Contractor shall fill out the transmittal form included in this project manual. All information shall be filled out completely prior to submitting the submittal. Any submittal submitted with missing information will be returned without processing.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.


m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare project specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).


D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Coordination Drawings”.

E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer.


c. Sample source.

5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Trade Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:

a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability. d. Delivery time.

6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample.

a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Trade Contractor.

F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space.

G. Delegated Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."


H. Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for the development of the Trade Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

I. Trade Contractor’s Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

J. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

K. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

L. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.


2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Trade Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.


F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.


P. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

Q. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

S. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Spence Brothers. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SPENCE BROTHERS' REVIEW

A. Spence Brothers will review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Spence Brothers’ approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Spence Brothers’ approval stamp and will return them without action.


B. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken and return promptly. Architect will review finish and color selection submittals with Owner before final approval.

C. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp. The

Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "No Exception Taken" the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "Note Marks - Process or Comments Attached - Process," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "Note Marks - Resubmit, Comments Attached - Resubmit, or Rejected - Resubmit ," do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.

D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements, will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Attention is directed to Division 0, Bidding and Contract Requirements, and to Division 1, General Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section.

1.02 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Each Trade Contractor is responsible to provide the Owner with a completed quality product for work. Each Trade Contractor shall be responsible for any costs associated with re-testing the work as a result of the Trade Contractor’s poor performance or workmanship.

B. All work shall be done by persons qualified in their respective trades, and the workmanship shall be first class in every respect. All materials and equipment furnished shall be the best of their respective kinds for the intended use and unless otherwise specified, same shall be new and of the latest design.

C. Spence Brothers and the Architect will have the authority to reject work that does not conform to the Contract Documents or require special inspection or testing, whether or not such work is to be then fabricated, installed or completed, but will take such action only after consultation with the Trade Contractor. Spence Brothers shall make all decisions with respect to questions concerning the quality or fitness of materials, equipment and workmanship.

D. Failure by a Trade Contractor to conduct their operations, means and methods and coordinate proper sequencing of the work will cause Spence Brothers to withhold payment or any other means deemed necessary to correct non-conforming work.

E. The Owner will employ without cost to the Trade Contractors, a testing firm to perform such engineering laboratory services and on site inspection as deemed necessary by the Owner, Spence Brothers and/or the Architect to determine compliance with the requirements of the contract. This work will not be a service to the Trade Contractors for the performing of tests and checking of materials required of the Contractors.

F. The testing firm will report directly to Spence Brothers. Copies of test and inspection reports will be furnished to the appropriate Trade Contractors. The laboratory and their representatives will be instruction to promptly call to the attention of the Trade Contractor, any instance of non-compliance with the requirements of the contract. Failure to so notify the Trade Contractor shall not relieve the Trade Contractor of any of their responsibilities for compliance or making good workmanship or materials, which are not in compliance with the requirements of the contract.

G. Each Trade Contractor shall cooperate with the testing firm and provide labor to assist with sample preparations where applicable.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements Page 2 of 2

1.03 NOTICE OF NON-CONFORMANCE

A. Spence Brothers will conduct quality inspections of the Trade Contractor’s work on a periodic basis. Spence Brothers’ inspections do not relive the Trade Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents or necessary corrections for deficiencies thereof. Representatives of Spence Brothers will notify Trade Contractors whose work does not meet the standards set by the Contract Documents. The Trade Contractor shall provide the corrective actions necessary in a timely manner.

1.04 TRADE CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

A. Spence Brothers will be evaluating Trade Contractor’s performance and provide feedback during the life of the project, on Trade Contractor’s performance, for the purpose of improving Spence Brothers’ contractor selection process for future project endeavors.

B. Trade Contractors will be requested to evaluate and provide feedback to Spence Brothers on ways for improvement on processes affecting any Trade Contractors.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 6000 – Bidding Substitutions Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 6000 BIDDING SUBSTITUTIONS


Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Bidding substitution form 01 6001. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

substitutions made during the bidding phase and prior to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to

award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Bidding substitution form 01 6001: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if requests are received within the time requirements listed in the instructions to bidders. Requests received after the date may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.

1. Submit one (1) copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests

in the form and according to procedures required in this section.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for

substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

b. Samples, where applicable or requested.

c. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 6000 – Bidding Substitutions Page 2 of 2

d. Project name

e. Date

f. Bid Category number

g. Name of manufacturer

i. Unique identifier, including revision number.

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Other necessary identification.

4. Architect’s Action: The Architect will notify the Trade Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution based on one of the conditions listed below.

a. Substitution approved - Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in

accordance with Spec. Section.

b. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.

c. Substitution request received too late - Use specified materials PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(Not Applicable)


Material Substitution RequestProject: Substitution Request No.To: From:

Date: A/E Project No.

Attn: Contract For:Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer:

Trade Name: Model No.:Installer:Address: Phone:History:

2 - 5 Years Old 5 - 10 Years Old More Than 10 Years OldDifferences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Potential Cost Savings to the OwnerProduct Comparison Information GuideComplete Product Data GuideProduct Submittal SheetProduct SampleAttached data includes product description, details, and performance/test data adequate for evaluation of the request.No changes to the contract documents are required if the proposed substitution is accepted.The undersigned certifies:

Submitted by:

Signed by:Firm:Address:Telephone: Fax: E-mail:Email:A/E's Review and Action

Substitution approved - Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Spec. Section

Substitution rejected - Use specified materials

Substitution request received too late - Use specified materials

Signed by: Date:

Supporting data attached Drawings Product Data Samples Tests

Reports Other

New Product

$

Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to the specified productperformance. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

Payments will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by substitutionProposed substitution does not affect dimensions and Functional Performance Values.

Spence Brothers Page 1 of 1 Pages Bidding Substitution Form

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 6005 – Substitutions Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 6005 SUBSTITUTIONS


Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

substitutions made after award of the Contract.

B. Related Section: The following section contains requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section “Submittals” specifies requirements for submitting the Trade

Contractor’s Construction Schedule and the Trade Contractor’s Submittal Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction

required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Trade Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to

award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents. 4. The Trade Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than sixty (60) days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.


1. Submit five (5) copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for change-order proposals.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each

request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers.

3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution.

b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those

of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size durability, and visual effect.

c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures. d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. A statement indicating the substitution’s effect on the Construction Manager/

Constructor Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. The Trade Contractor’s certification that the proposed substitution conforms to

requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.

h. The Trade Contractor’s waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may

subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

4. Architect’s Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Trade Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order.

a. Use the product specified if the Architect fails to respond with the above

requirements.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Trade Contractor’s request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

5. The request is directly related to an “or-equal” clause or similar language in the Contract

Documents. 6. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy

conversation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner’s additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a

governing authority and the requested substitution can be approved. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is

compatible with other materials and where the Trade Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other

materials and where the Trade Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by

the Contract Documents and where the Trade Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

11. Where a proposed substitution involves more than one Trade Contractor, each Trade

Contractor shall cooperate with the other Trade Contractors involved to coordinate the Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products.


B. The Trade Contractor’s submittal and the Architect’s acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute approval.


(Not Applicable)


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7000 – Execution Requirements Page 1 of 7

SECTION 01 7000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Meetings" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and

patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and


verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Spence Brothers not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Spence Brothers’ written permission.


C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Spence Brothers. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify promptly.

B. General: Spence Brothers will engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Spence Brothers will establish benchmarks and control points to allow trade contractors to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Spence Brothers.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Spence Brothers will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Spence Brothers. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control


points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Spence Brothers before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of three permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: Spence Brothers may upon completion of the foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 7’-6” in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.


H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

B. Coordination: All Trade Contractors will coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Spence Brothers will inform the Owner of their preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Spence Brothers will include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.


C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7329 – Cutting & Patching Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01 7329 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.


1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations.

2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

3. Divisions 2 through 40 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List

utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.


6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Spence Brothers’ Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

1. As structural elements that require Architect's and Spence Brothers’ approval of a cutting and patching proposal.

a. Foundation Construction b. Bearing and Retaining Walls c. Structural Concrete d. Structural Steel Decking e. Exterior Curtain Wall

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's


aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to cut and patch exposed Work listed below. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator, engage another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm.

a. Processed concrete finishes. b. Stonework and stone masonry. c. Ornamental metal. d. Matched veneer woodwork. e. Preformed metal panels. f. Roofing. g. Firestopping. h. Window wall system. i. Terrazzo. j. Finished wood flooring. k. Fluid-applied flooring. l. Aggregate wall coating. m. Wall covering. n. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Before proceeding, meet at project site with parties involved with cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical teams. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

2. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.


2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning.


1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives.

3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for Record Drawing, Record

Specifications, Record Product Data requirements. 6. Divisions 2 through 40 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.


5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Spence Brothers of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Spence Brothers of items, either on Spence Brothers’ list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, will either proceed with inspection or notify Spence Brothers of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Spence Brothers of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.


1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Spence Brothers that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with the Basement first and proceeding up the floors.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect, Spence Brothers, and Owners reference during normal working hours.

B. Refer to Section 01 7839 – Project Record Documents for Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data requirements.

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Trade Contractors will assemble three complete sets of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Electronic copies of print information shall be submitted also. Include the Commissioning requirements in the O & M Manuals. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Operation Data:

a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend

operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams.

2. Maintenance Data:

a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.


e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds.

B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.

1.8 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Trade Contractors will submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 30 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Spence Brothers.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Instruction: Trade Contractors will instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal

operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction, and course content.

B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:

1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Spence Brothers will provide final cleaning (unless specified in your specifications or work scopes). Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.


f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7836 – Warranties and Guaranties Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 7836 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and guaranties from Manufacturers, Suppliers and Subcontractors.


Related Sections include the following:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Section 00650 "Certificates of Insurance" for submitting:

a. Letter from Contractor’s Insurance carrier that a Certificate of Insurance shall be sent to the Construction Manager at renewal time for a two (2) year period after substantial completion.

1.3 SUBMITTALS (CLOSE-OUT)

General: Prepare and submit warranties and guaranties:

1. The Contractor shall provide a written Guaranty for all labor, material, equipment and workmanship for a minimum period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion of the project (or longer period of time if stipulated in the specifications) covering the work of their entire Bid Division(s).

2. The Contractor shall also provide a written Warranty covering all work of their entire Bid Division(s) for a minimum period of two (2) years from the date of final project completion (or longer period of time if stipulated in the specifications).

3. The Contractor shall further provide all supplier, manufacturer, subcontractor and other written guaranties and warranties covering the work of the entire Bid Division(s) as required by the project specifications (longer period of time if stipulated in the specifications).

4. The Contractor shall provide a quantity of three (3) original written Guaranties and Warranties.

5. The Contractor shall review all guaranties and warranties to assure of their compliance with all conditions of the contract.

Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7836 – Warranties and Guaranties Page 2 of 2

6. The Contractor shall assemble all guaranties and warranties, fully executed by each respective contractor, supplier, manufacturer and subcontractor, in a three ring binder and submit to the construction manager within ten (10) days of the date of Substantial Completion of the project.

7. If the Owner elects to permit equipment and component parts of equipment into service during the progress of construction and has issues such permission in writing, all such guaranties and warranties must be submitted to the construction manager within ten (10) days after inspection and acceptance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


Essexville Hampton Schools Spence Brothers - Project Manual Bid Package 1 Section 01 7839 – Project Record Documents Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 7839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and

maintenance manual requirements. 2. Divisions 2 through 40 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents

of products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Transfer all as-built conditions to the master set held by the Construction Manager.

B. Record Specifications:

1. Transfer all as-built conditions to the master set held by the Construction Manager.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings and transfer all notations to the master set held by the Construction Manager.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.


a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult with Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications and transfer all notations to the master set held by the Construction Manager.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. Transfer all notations to Record Set held by Construction Manager.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from reference during normal working hours.


RICK. SNYDER STATE OF MICHIGAN

GOVERNOR Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476

Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825

Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects

(06/11) Page 1 of 1

REQUIREMENTS OF THE PREVAILING WAGES ON STATE PROJECTS ACT, PUBLIC ACT 166 OF 1965

The State of Michigan determines prevailing rates pursuant to the Prevailing Wages on State Projects Act, Public Act 166 of 1965, as amended. The purpose of establishing prevailing rates is to provide minimum rates of pay that must be paid to workers on construction projects for which the state or a school district is the contracting agent and which is financed or financially supported by the state. By law, prevailing rates are compiled from the rates contained in collectively bargained agreements which cover the locations of the state projects. The official prevailing rate schedule provides an hourly rate which includes wage and fringe benefit totals for designated construction mechanic classifications. The overtime rates also include wage and fringe benefit totals. Please pay special attention to the overtime and premium pay requirements. Prevailing wage is satisfied when wages plus fringe benefits paid to a worker are equal to or greater than the required rate. State of Michigan responsibilities under the law:

• The department establishes the prevailing rate for each classification of construction mechanic requested by a contracting agent prior to contracts being let out for bid on a state project.

Contracting agent responsibilities under the law: • If a contract is not awarded or construction does not start within 90 days of the date of the issuance of rates, a re-

determination of rates must be requested by the contracting agent. • Rates for classifications needed but not provided on the Prevailing Rate Schedule, must be obtained prior to contracts

being let out for bid on a state project. • The contracting agent, by written notice to the contractor and the sureties of the contractor known to the contracting

agent, may terminate the contractor's right to proceed with that part of the contract, for which less than the prevailing rates have been or will be paid, and may proceed to complete the contract by separate agreement with another contractor or otherwise, and the original contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the contracting agent for any excess costs occasioned thereby.

Contractor responsibilities under the law: • Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all

prevailing rates prescribed in a contract. • Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name and occupation of and the actual

wages and benefits paid to each construction mechanic employed by him in connection including certified payroll, as used in the industry, with said contract. This record shall be available for reasonable inspection by the contracting agent or the department.

• Each contractor or subcontractor is separately liable for the payment of the prevailing rate to its employees. • The prime contractor is responsible for advising all subcontractors of the requirement to pay the prevailing rate prior to

commencement of work. • The prime contractor is secondarily liable for payment of prevailing rates that are not paid by a subcontractor. • A construction mechanic shall only be paid the apprentice rate if registered with the United States Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training and the rate is included in the contract. Enforcement: A person who has information of an alleged prevailing wage violation on a state project may file a complaint with the State of Michigan. The department will investigate and attempt to resolve the complaint informally. During the course of an investigation, if the requested records and posting certification are not made available in compliance with Section 5 of Act 166, the investigation will be concluded and a referral to the Office of Attorney General for civil action will be made. The Office of Attorney General will pursue costs and fees associated with a lawsuit if filing is necessary to obtain records.

RICK. SNYDER STATE OF MICHIGAN

GOVERNOR Prevailing Wages PO Box 30476

Lansing, MI 48909 517-322-1825

Informational Sheet: Prevailing Wages on State Projects

(06/11) Page 1 of 1

General Information Regarding Fringe Benefits

Certain fringe benefits may be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate: o If a fringe benefit is paid directly to a construction mechanic o If a fringe benefit contribution or payment is made on behalf of a construction mechanic o If a fringe benefit, which may be provided to a construction mechanic, is pursuant to a written contract

or policy o If a fringe benefit is paid into a fund, for a construction mechanic

When a fringe benefit is not paid by an hourly rate, the hourly credit will be calculated based on the annual value of the fringe benefit divided by 2080 hours per year (52 weeks @ 40 hours per week). The following is an example of the types of fringe benefits allowed and how an hourly credit is calculated: Vacation Dental insurance Vision insurance Health insurance Life insurance Tuition Bonus 401k Employer Contribution Total Hourly Credit

40 hours X $14.00 per hour = $560/2080 = $31.07 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $372.84 /2080 = $5.38 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $64.56/2080 = $230.00 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $2,760.00/2080 = $27.04 monthly premium X 12 mos. = $324.48/2080 = $500.00 annual cost/2080 = 4 quarterly bonus/year x $250 = $1000.00/2080 = $2000.00 total annual contribution/2080 =

$.27$.18$.03

$1.33$.16$.24$.48$.96

$3.65

Other examples of the types of fringe benefits allowed: Sick pay Holiday pay Accidental Death & Dismemberment insurance premiums

The following are examples of items that will not be credited toward the payment of the Prevailing Wage Rate:o Legally required payments, such as:

Unemployment Insurance payments Workers’ Compensation Insurance payments FICA (Social Security contributions, Medicare contributions)

o Reimbursable expenses, such as: Clothing allowance or reimbursement Uniform allowance or reimbursement Gas allowance or reimbursement Travel time or payment Meals or lodging allowance or reimbursement Per diem allowance or payment

o Other payments to or on behalf of a construction mechanic that are not wages or fringe benefits, such as: Industry advancement funds Financial or material loans

State of Michigan

DEPARTMENT OF LICENSING AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS MICHIGAN OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION

MARTHA B. YODER DIRECTOR

OVERTIME PROVISIONS for MICHIGAN PREVAILING WAGE RATE COMMERCIAL SCHEDULE

LARA is an equal opportunity employer. Auxiliary aids, services and other reasonable accommodations are available upon request to individuals with disabilities.

Wage & Hour Division 7150 HARRIS DRIVE P.O. BOX 30476 LANSING, MICHIGAN 48909

www.michigan.gov/wagehour Phone : (517) 322-1825

1. Overtime is represented as a nine character code. Each character represents a certain period of time after the first 8 hours Monday thru Friday.

Monday thru Friday Saturday Sunday & Holidays Four 10s

First 8 Hours 4

9th Hour 1 5

10th Hour 2 6

Over 10 hours 3 7

8 9

Overtime for Monday thru Friday after 8 hours: the 1st character is for time worked in the 9th hour (8.1 - 9 hours) the 2nd character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 3rd character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.1 and beyond)

Overtime on Saturday: the 4th character is for time worked in the first 8 hours on Saturday (0 - 8 hours) the 5th character is for time worked in the 9th hour on Saturday (8.1 - 9 hours) the 6th character is for time worked in the 10th hour (9.1 - 10 hours) the 7th character is for time worked beyond the 10th hour (10.01 and beyond)

Overtime on Sundays & Holidays The 8th character is for time worked on Sunday or on a holiday

Four Ten Hour Days The 9th character indicates if an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked between Monday and Friday without paying overtime after 8 hours worked, unless otherwise noted in the rate schedule. To utilize a 4 ten workweek, notice is required from the employer to employee prior to the start of work on the project.

2. Overtime Indicators Used in the Overtime Provision: H - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due X - means TIME AND ONE-HALF due after 40 HOURS worked D - means DOUBLE PAY due Y - means YES an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked N - means NO an optional 4-day 10-hour per day workweek can not be worked without paying overtime after 8 hours worked

3. EXAMPLES: HHHHHHHDN - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 8 hours Monday thru Friday (characters 1 - 3); for all hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 - 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The N (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is not an acceptable workweek at regular pay.

XXXHHHHDY - This example shows that the 1½ rate must be used for time worked after 40 hours are worked Monday thru Friday (characters 1-3); for hours worked on Saturday, 1½ rate is due (characters 4 – 7). Work done on Sundays or holidays must be paid double time (character 8). The Y (character 9) indicates that 4 ten-hour days is an acceptable alternative workweek.

ENGINEERS - CLASSES OF EQUIPMENT LIST

UNDERGROUND ENGINEERS HAZARDOUS WASTE ABATEMENT ENGINEERS CLASS I Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clam-Shell, Concrete Paver (2 drums or larger), Conveyor Loader (Euclid type), Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, End Loader, Gradall (and similar type machine), Grader, Power Shovel, Roller (asphalt), Scraper (self propelled or tractor drawn), Side Broom Tractor (type D-4 or larger), Slope Paver, Trencher (over 8’ digging capacity), Well Drilling Rig, Mechanic, Slip Form Paver, Hydro Excavator. CLASS II Boom Truck (power swing type boom), Crusher, Hoist, Pump (1 or more 6" discharge or larger gas or diesel powered by generator of 300 amps or more, inclusive of generator), Side Boom Tractor (smaller than type D-4 or equivalent), Tractor (pneu-tired, other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher (8’ digging capacity and smaller), Vac Truck. CLASS III Air Compressors (600 cfm or larger), Air Compressors (2 or more less than 600 cfm), Boom Truck (non-swinging, non-powered type boom), Concrete Breaker (self-propelled or truck mounted, includes compressor), Concrete Paver (1 drum, ½ yard or larger), Elevator (other than passenger), Maintenance Man, Mechanic Helper, Pump (2 or more 4" up to 6" discharge, gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pump), Pumpcrete Machine (and similar equipment), Wagon Drill Machine, Welding Machine or Generator (2 or more 300 amp or larger, gas or diesel powered). CLASS IV Boiler, Concrete Saw (40HP or over), Curing Machine (self-propelled), Farm Tractor (w/attachment), Finishing Machine (concrete), Firemen, Hydraulic Pipe Pushing Machine, Mulching Equipment, Oiler (2 or more up to 4", exclude submersible), Pumps (2 or more up to 4" discharge if used 3 hrs or more a day-gas or diesel powered, excluding submersible pumps), Roller (other than asphalt), Stump Remover, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (6’ wide or over), Trencher (service) Sweeper (Wayne type and similar equipment), Water Wagon, Extend-a-Boom Forklift.

CLASS I Backhoe, Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Breaker when attached to hoe, Concrete Cleaning Decontamination Machine Operator, Concrete Pump, Concrete Paver, Crusher, Dozer, Elevating Grader, Endloader, Farm Tractor (90 h.p. and higher), Gradall, Grader, Heavy Equipment Robotics Operator, Hydro Excavator, Loader, Pug Mill, Pumpcrete Machines, Pump Trucks, Roller, Scraper (self-propelled or tractor drawn), Side Boom Tractor, Slip Form Paver, Slope Paver, Trencher, Ultra High Pressure Waterjet Cutting Tool System Operator, Vactors, Vacuum Blasting Machine Operator, Vertical Lifting Hoist, Vibrating Compaction Equipment (self-propelled), and Well Drilling Rig. CLASS II Air Compressor, Concrete Breaker when not attached to hoe, Elevator, End Dumps, Equipment Decontamination Operator, Farm Tractor (less than 90 h.p.), Forklift, Generator, Heater, Mulcher, Pigs (Portable Reagent Storage Tanks), Power Screens, Pumps (water), Stationary Compressed Air Plant, Sweeper, Water Wagon and Welding Machine.

State of Michigan [email protected] Official Request #: 594 Requestor: Essexville-Hampton Public Schools Project Description: Multiple Schools - Room Addition, Asbestos Removal, Renovations, Replacements Project Number: Bay County Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 1 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer Asbestos & Lead Abatement Laborer MLDC 10/1/2014 $40.25 $53.64 $67.03 H H H X X X X D Y 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive

Asbestos & Lead Abatement, Hazardous Material Handler Asbestos and Lead Abatement, Hazardous AS207 10/1/2014 $40.25 $53.58 $66.90 H H H X X X X D Y Material Handler 4 ten hour days @ straight time allowed Monday-Saturday, must be consecutive

Boilermaker Boilermaker BO169 2/17/2015 $54.70 $81.08 $107.45 H H H H H H H D Y Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $40.31 $59.49 $78.67 2nd 6 months $41.45 $61.21 $80.95 3rd 6 months $42.57 $62.88 $83.19 4th 6 months $43.69 $64.57 $85.43 5th 6 months $44.81 $66.24 $87.67 6th 6 months $48.63 $72.50 $96.36 7th 6 months $49.32 $73.01 $96.69 8th 6 months $51.58 $76.40 $101.21

Official Request #: 594 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Essexville-Hampton Public Schools Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Multiple Schools - Room Addition, Asbestos Removal, on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Bay Page 1 of 31

Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 2 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Bricklayer Bricklayer, Stone, and Artificial Masonry, BR9-7-BL 4/14/2015 $43.14 $56.19 $69.24 H H H H H H H D Y Pointer, Cleaner, Caulker Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-F; Saturday make up day Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $32.70 $40.53 $48.36 750-1499 hours $34.00 $42.48 $50.96 1500-2249 hours $35.31 $44.44 $53.58 2250-2999 hours $36.62 $46.41 $56.20 3000-3749 hours $37.92 $48.36 $58.80 3750-4499 hours $39.22 $50.31 $61.40 4500-5249 hours $40.53 $52.28 $64.02 5250-6000 hours $41.84 $54.24 $66.64

Carpenter Resilient Floorlayer CA706FL 6/9/2014 $35.00 $43.75 $52.50 X X H H H H H D N Apprentice Rates: 1st year $28.00 $33.25 $38.50 2nd year $29.75 $35.88 $42.00 3rd year $30.62 $37.18 $43.74 4th year $32.38 $39.82 $47.26

Carpenter, piledriver CA706Z4-CA 6/9/2014 $41.48 $53.15 $64.81 X X H H H H H D N Apprentice Rates: 1st year $32.15 $39.15 $46.15 2nd year $34.48 $42.65 $50.81 3rd year $35.65 $44.40 $53.15 4th year $37.98 $47.89 $57.81


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 3 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Cement Finisher Cement Finisher BR9-7-CF 3/17/2015 $39.65 $51.70 $63.74 X X H X X X H D Y 4 10s allowed M-F Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $31.22 $39.05 $46.88 750-1499 hours $32.42 $40.85 $49.28 1500-2249 hours $33.63 $42.66 $51.70 2250-2999 hours $34.83 $44.46 $54.10 3000-3749 hours $36.04 $46.28 $56.52 3750-4499 hours $37.24 $48.08 $58.92

Cement Mason Cement Mason PL16-12 10/23/2012 $37.85 $50.59 $63.32 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday or Saturday inclement weather make up days. Saturday hours for inclement weather make up shall be paid straight rate unless over 40 hours worked. Make up day allowed comment Friday or Saturday for inclement weather Apprentice Rates: 1st year $28.94 $37.22 $45.50 2nd year $31.48 $41.03 $50.58 3rd year $34.03 $44.86 $55.68


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 4 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Drywall Drywall Finisher PT-1803-DF 7/16/2014 $37.14 $48.60 $60.05 H H H H H H H D Y 4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, Monday-Friday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Make up day allowed comment Monday or Friday Apprentice Rates: 0 - 900 hours $25.69 $31.42 $37.15 901- 1800 hours $29.12 $36.57 $44.01 1801 - 2700 hours $32.56 $41.73 $50.89 2701 - 3600 hours $34.85 $45.16 $55.47

Electrician Inside Wireman EC-692-IW-Z1 8/26/2014 $48.08 $68.47 $88.86 H H H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed comment Four 10s allowed M-F; Monday or Friday may be used for make-up days. Apprentice Rates: Period 1 $22.09 $30.24 $38.38 Period 2 $23.92 $32.99 $42.04 Period 3 $27.54 $38.42 $49.28 Period 4 $29.35 $41.12 $52.90 Period 5 $32.97 $46.55 $60.14 Period 6 $36.59 $51.98 $67.38


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 5 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sound and Communication Installer/Technician EC-692-SC 3/11/2013 $27.29 $37.89 $48.49 H H H H H H H D N Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $12.56 $17.87 $23.17 2nd 6 months $13.63 $19.46 $25.29 3rd 6 months $15.79 $22.68 $29.57 4th 6 months $16.86 $24.28 $31.70 5th 6 months $18.82 $27.22 $35.62 6th 6 months $21.18 $30.72 $40.26

Lineman/Technician outside utility and EC-876 11/18/2009 $47.05 $68.11 $89.17 H H H H H H H D Y commercial power and high voltage pipe type cable work and electrical underground. Four 10s allowed Monday-Thursday with Friday makeup or Tuesday-Friday with Monday Apprentice Rates: 1st period $30.20 $42.69 $55.26 2nd period $32.32 $46.02 $59.70 3rd period $34.42 $49.16 $63.90 4th period $36.53 $52.33 $68.12 5th period $38.63 $55.47 $72.32 6th period $40.74 $58.64 $76.54 7th period $42.84 $61.79 $80.74

Elevator Constructor Elevator Constructor EL 36 8/7/2007 $56.46 $94.99 D D D D D D D D Y Elevator Constructor Make up day allowed Apprentice Rates: 1st Year Apprentice $37.74 $58.93 2nd Year Apprentice $41.90 $66.94 3rd Year Apprentice $43.98 $70.95 4th Year Apprentice $48.14 $78.96


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 6 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision ===================================================================================================

Glazier Glazier GL-826 7/16/2014 $43.53 $58.26 $72.98 H H H H H H H D Y 4 tens allowed on consecutive days Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $31.04 $39.87 $48.71 2nd 6 months $32.60 $42.17 $51.74 3rd 6 months $34.17 $44.48 $54.79 4th 6 months $35.73 $46.78 $57.82 5th 6 months $37.28 $49.06 $60.84 6th 6 months $38.84 $51.35 $63.87 7th 6 months $40.40 $53.65 $66.90 8th 6 months $41.97 $55.96 $69.95

Heat and Frost Insulator Spray Insulation AS25S 3/5/2007 $20.14 $29.14 H H H H H H H H N

Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker Heat and Frost Insulator and Asbestos Worker AS47 3/11/2013 $44.40 $58.76 $73.12 H H H H H H H D Y 4 ten hour work days shall be either Monday thru Thursday or Tuesday thru Friday Make up day allowed comment Friday for missed time during M-Th 4 ten schedule Apprentice Rates: 1st year $25.78 $32.96 $40.14 2nd year $29.50 $38.11 $46.73 3rd year $33.22 $43.27 $53.32 4th year $36.95 $48.44 $59.93 5th year $40.68 $53.61 $66.53


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 7 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Ironworker Siding, Glazing, Curtain Wall IR-25-GZ2 9/4/2014 $46.41 $58.07 $69.73 X X H H H H D D Y 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. Make up day allowed comment Friday Apprentice Rates: Level 1 $29.48 $36.09 $42.68 Level 2 $31.59 $38.83 $46.05 Level 3 $33.71 $41.58 $49.44 Level 4 $35.83 $44.33 $52.82 Level 5 $37.94 $47.07 $56.20 Level 6 $40.06 $49.82 $59.58

Pre-engineered Metal Work IR-25-PE-Z1 6/3/2014 $45.24 $55.53 $65.81 X X H X X X X D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 tens allowed M-Th with Saturday make up day Apprentice Rates: 1st Year $26.11 $31.58 $37.06 3rd 6 month period $28.23 $34.46 $40.68 4th 6 month period $30.36 $37.35 $44.33 5th 6 month period $32.48 $40.21 $47.95 6th 6 month period $34.61 $43.99 $53.37

Reinforced Iron Work IR-25-RF 9/3/2014 $55.36 $82.91 $110.45 H H D H D D D D N Make up day allowed Apprentice Rates: Level 1 $36.01 $53.89 $71.75 Level 2 $38.38 $57.43 $76.49 Level 3 $40.74 $60.98 $81.21 Level 4 $43.28 $64.78 $86.29 Level 5 $45.81 $68.59 $91.35 Level 6 $48.35 $72.39 $96.43


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 8 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Rigging Work IR-25-RIG 9/3/2014 $61.33 $91.67 $122.00 H H H H H H H D N Apprentice Rates: Level 1& 2 $36.63 $54.59 $72.55 Level 3 $39.46 $58.84 $78.21 Level 4 $42.28 $63.07 $83.85 Level 5 $45.11 $67.31 $89.51 Level 6 $47.94 $71.56 $95.17

Decking IR-25-SD 9/4/2014 $53.29 $79.63 $105.96 X X H H H H D D Y 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time. Make up day allowed comment Friday for 4 tens M-Th Saturday for 5 eights M-F

Structural, ornamental, welder and pre-cast IR-25-STR 9/3/2014 $61.46 $91.84 $122.21 H H H H H H D D Y 4 tens may be worked Monday thru Thursday @ straight time. If bad weather, Friday may be a make up day. If holiday celebrated on a Monday, 4 10s may be worked Tuesday thru Friday. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time. Make up day allowed Apprentice Rates: Levels 1 & 2 $36.05 $54.01 $71.97 Level 3 $38.88 $58.26 $77.63 Level 4 $41.70 $62.49 $83.27 Level 5 $44.53 $66.73 $88.93 Level 6 $47.36 $70.98 $94.59 Level 7 $50.18 $75.20 $100.23 Level 8 $53.01 $79.46 $105.89


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 9 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Industrial Door erection & construction IR-25-STR-D 9/4/2014 $42.02 $62.68 $83.33 H H H H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment Friday for bad weather when 4 tens scheduled for M-Th. If holiday celebrated on M, 4 tens may be worked T-F. Work in excess of 12 hours per day must be paid @ double time.

Fence, Sound Barrier & Guardrail IR-340-F2 2/24/2015 $30.71 $40.71 $50.71 X X H X X X H D Y erection/installation and Exterior Signage work Four ten hour work days may be worked during Monday-Saturday. Apprentice Rates: 60% Level $20.35 $26.35 $32.35 65% Level $21.45 $27.95 $34.45 70% Level $22.56 $29.56 $36.56 75% Level $23.65 $31.15 $38.65 80% Level $24.75 $32.75 $40.75 85% Level $25.85 $34.35 $42.85


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 10 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer Class A Laborer on building and heavy L1098-S-A 6/27/2014 $31.83 $41.34 $50.85 X X H H H H H D Y construction work, mortar mixers, mason tender, carpenter tender, fire watch, all 3" pumps and below, plaster mixers, plaster tenders, pipe or crock layers, signal men and top men on caisson work, mechanized buggy operators, cement finisher tender, air, electric and gas-driven tools, concrete vibrators & demolition work Cleaning and clearing of all debris, including wire brushing of windows, scraping of floors, removal of surplus material from all fixtures within confines of structure and cleaning all debris in building and construction area. The general cleanup, including sweeping, cleaning, washdown and wiping of construction facility, equipment and furnishings and removal and loading or burning of all debris including crates, boxes, packaging waste material. Washing and cleaning of walls, partitions, ceilings, windows, bathrooms, kitchens, laboratory, and all fixtures and facilities therein. Cleanup, mopping, washing, waxing and polishing or dusting of all Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $27.07 $34.20 $41.33 1,001-2,000 work hours $28.03 $35.64 $43.25 2,001-3,000 work hours $28.98 $37.07 $45.15 3,001-4,000 work hours $30.88 $39.91 $48.95


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 11 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class B Laborer air or electric-driven pavement L1098-S-B 6/27/2014 $32.33 $42.09 $51.85 X X H H H H H D Y breakers and jackhammers over 50 lbs., tunnel miners and tunnel muckers, tunnel and shaft underpinning contributing to the structural support of buildings Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $27.45 $34.77 $42.09 1,001-2,000 work hours $28.43 $36.24 $44.05 2,001-3,000 work hours $29.40 $37.69 $45.99 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.35 $40.62 $49.89

Class C Laborer-drillers, blasters, burners, L1098-S-C 6/27/2014 $32.84 $42.85 $52.86 X X H H H H H D Y welders, & refractory work Make up day allowed comment Saturday Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $27.84 $35.35 $42.86 1,001-2,000 work hours $28.84 $36.85 $44.86 2,001-3,000 work hours $29.84 $38.35 $46.86 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.84 $41.35 $50.86


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 12 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer - Hazardous Class A Laborer - performing work in conjunction LHAZ-Z8-A 11/7/2014 $31.83 $44.84 $57.85 H H H H H H H D Y with site preparation and other preliminary work prior to actual removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances not requiring use of personal protective equipment required by state or federal regulations; or a laborer performing work in conjunction with the removal , handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when use of personal protective equipment level "D" is required. Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th or T-F; inclement weather makeup day Friday Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $27.07 $37.70 $48.33 1,001-2,000 work hours $28.03 $39.14 $50.25 2,001-3,000 work hours $28.98 $40.57 $52.15 3,001-4,000 work hours $30.88 $43.41 $55.95

Class B Laborer - performing work in conjunction LHAZ-Z8-B 11/7/2014 $32.83 $46.34 $59.85 H H H H H H H D Y with the removal, handling, or containment of hazardous waste substances when the use of personal protective equipment levels "A", "B" or "C" is required. Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th or T-F; inclement weather makeup day Friday Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $27.83 $38.84 $49.85 1,001-2,000 work hours $28.83 $40.34 $51.85 2,001-3,000 work hours $29.83 $41.84 $53.85 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.83 $44.84 $57.85


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 13 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Laborer Underground - Tunnel, Shaft & Caisson Class I - Tunnel, shaft and caisson laborer, LAUCT-Z2-1 10/30/2014 $35.67 $47.07 $58.47 X X X X X X X D Y dump man, shanty man, hog house tender, testing man (on gas), and watchman. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.52 $39.35 $48.17 1,001-2,000 work hours $31.55 $40.90 $50.23 2,001-3,000 work hours $32.58 $42.44 $52.29 3,001-4,000 work hours $34.64 $45.53 $56.41

Class II - Manhole, headwall, catch basin LAUCT-Z2-2 10/30/2014 $35.76 $47.21 $58.65 X X X X X X X D Y builder, bricklayer tender, mortar man, material mixer, fence erector, and guard rail builder Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.58 $39.44 $48.29 1,001-2,000 work hours $31.62 $41.00 $50.37 2,001-3,000 work hours $32.66 $42.56 $52.45 3,001-4,000 work hours $34.72 $45.65 $56.57


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 14 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class III - Air tool operator (jack hammer man, LAUCT-Z2-3 10/30/2014 $35.86 $47.36 $58.85 X X X X X X X D Y bush hammer man and grinding man), first bottom man, second bottom man, cage tender, car pusher, carrier man, concrete man, concrete form man, concrete repair man, cement invert laborer, cement finisher, concrete shoveler, conveyor man, floor man, gasoline and electric tool operator, gunnite man, grout operator, welder, heading dinky man, inside lock tender, pea gravel operator, pump man, outside lock tender, scaffold man, top signal man, switch man, track man, tugger man, utility man, vibrator man, winch operator, pipe jacking man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.). Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.66 $39.56 $48.45 1,001-2,000 work hours $31.70 $41.12 $50.53 2,001-3,000 work hours $32.74 $42.68 $52.61 3,001-4,000 work hours $34.82 $45.80 $56.77

Class IV - Tunnel, shaft and caisson mucker, LAUCT-Z2-4 10/30/2014 $36.02 $47.60 $59.17 X X X X X X X D Y bracer man, liner plate man, long haul dinky driver and well point man. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.78 $39.74 $48.69 1,001-2,000 work hours $31.83 $41.32 $50.79 2,001-3,000 work hours $32.88 $42.89 $52.89 3,001-4,000 work hours $34.97 $46.02 $57.07


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 15 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class V - Tunnel, shaft and caisson miner, drill LAUCT-Z2-5 10/30/2014 $36.28 $47.99 $59.69 X X X X X X X D Y runner, keyboard operator, power knife operator, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars) Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $30.98 $40.04 $49.09 1,001-2,000 work hours $32.04 $41.63 $51.21 2,001-3,000 work hours $33.10 $43.22 $53.33 3,001-4,000 work hours $35.22 $46.40 $57.57

Class VI - Dynamite man and powder man. LAUCT-Z2-6 10/30/2014 $36.59 $48.45 $60.31 X X X X X X X D Y Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $31.21 $40.38 $49.55 1,001-2,000 work hours $32.28 $41.99 $51.69 2,001-3,000 work hours $33.36 $43.61 $53.85 3,001-4,000 work hours $35.51 $46.84 $58.15

Class VII - Restoration laborer, seeding, LAUCT-Z2-7 10/30/2014 $28.86 $36.86 $44.85 X X X X X X X D Y sodding, planting, cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes and flagstones. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $25.41 $31.68 $37.95 1,001-2,000 work hours $26.10 $32.72 $39.33 2,001-3,000 work hours $26.79 $33.76 $40.71 3,001-4,000 work hours $28.17 $35.82 $43.47


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 16 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Landscape Laborer Landscape Specialist includes air, gas, and diesel LLAN-Z2-A 6/26/2014 $27.85 $38.49 $49.12 X X H X X X H D Y equipment operator, skidsteer (or equivalent), lawn sprinkler installer on landscaping work where seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintenance of landscape projects occurs. Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.

Skilled Landscape Laborer: small power tool LLAN-Z2-B 6/26/2014 $23.65 $31.06 $38.47 X X H X X X H D Y operator, lawn sprinkler installers' tender, material mover, truck driver on when seeding, sodding, planting, cutting, trimming, backfilling, rough grading or maintaining of landscape projects occurs Sundays paid at time & one half. Holidays paid at double time.

Operating Engineer Class C- Regular equipment operator, crane, stiff EN-324-BH2C 8/5/2014 $49.55 $63.42 $77.29 H H H H H H H D Y leg derrick, scraper dozer, grader, front end loader, hoist, job mechanic, head grease man, concrete pump truck and hydro excavators Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday. Apprentice Rates: 0 - 999 hours $40.33 $50.04 $59.75 1,000 - 1,999 hours $41.71 $52.11 $62.51 2,000 - 2,999 hours $43.10 $54.19 $65.29 3,000 - 3,999 hours $44.49 $56.28 $68.07 4,000 - 4,999 hours $45.88 $58.37 $70.85 5,000 - 5,999 hours $47.26 $60.43 $73.61


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 17 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class D- Air tugger (single drum), material hoist, EN-324-BH2D 8/5/2014 $44.75 $56.22 $67.69 H H H H H H H D Y boiler operator, sweeping machine, winch truck, Bob Cat and similar equipment, elevators (when operated by an operating engineer), and fork truck over 20' lift Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class E- Pump 6" or over, well points, freeze EN-324-BH2E 8/5/2014 $44.15 $55.32 $66.49 H H H H H H H D Y systems, boom truck (non-swinging), end dumps and laser/power screed, concrete wire saw 20 h.p. and over and brokk concrete breaker Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class F- Air compressor, welder, generators, EN-324-BH2F 8/5/2014 $41.70 $51.65 $61.59 H H H H H H H D Y conveyors, pumps under 6", Grease man, and fork truck 20' or less lift Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Class G- Oiler, fireman and heater operator EN-324-BH2G 8/5/2014 $40.00 $49.10 $58.19 H H H H H H H D Y Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 18 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 220' or EN-OSA 8/5/2014 $50.90 $65.45 $79.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 300' or EN-OSA3 8/5/2014 $52.40 $67.70 $82.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday-

Class A- Crane w/ main Boom & Jib 400' or EN-OSA4 8/5/2014 $53.90 $69.95 $85.99 H H H H H H H D Y longer Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work not performed due to weather, Monday-Thursday

Class B- Crane Operator with main boom and EN-OSB 8/5/2014 $50.65 $65.07 $79.49 H H H H H H H D Y jib 140' or longer, tower cranes, gantry crane, whirley derrick Four 10 hour days may be scheduled Monday- Thursday or Tuesday-Friday. Work unabled to be performed due to weather, Monday- Thursday may be scheduled on Friday.

Operating Engineer - DIVER Diver/Wet Tender/Tender/Rov Pilot/Rov Tender GLF D 4/2/2014 $52.80 $79.20 $105.60 H H H H H H H D N

Official Request #: 594 Official Rate Schedule Requestor: Essexville-Hampton Public Schools Every contractor and subcontractor shall keep posted Project Description: Multiple Schools - Room Addition, Asbestos Removal, on the construction site, in a conspicuous place, a copy of all prevailing wage and fringe benefit rates Project Number: prescribed in a contract. County: Statewide Page 18 of 31

Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 19 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer - Marine Construction Diver/Wet Tender, Engineer (hydraulic dredge) GLF-1 2/12/2014 $65.00 $84.85 $104.70 X X H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed

Subdivision of county all Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters Crane/Backhoe Operator, 70 ton or over Tug GLF-2 2/12/2014 $63.50 $82.60 $101.70 X X H H H H H D Y Operator, Mechanic/Welder, Assistant Engineer (hydraulic dredge), Leverman (hydraulic dredge), Diver Tender Holiday pay = $120.80 per hour, wages & Make up day allowed

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters Friction, Lattice Boom or Crane License GLF-2B 2/12/2014 $64.50 $84.10 $103.70 X X H H H H H D Y Certification Holiday pay = $123.30 Make up day allowed

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands, therein, & connecting & tributary waters Deck Equipment Operator, Machineryman, GLF-3 2/12/2014 $59.30 $76.30 $93.30 X X H H H H H D Y Maintenance of Crane (over 50 ton capacity) or Backhoe (115,000 lbs or more), Tug/Launch Operator, Loader, Dozer on Barge, Deck Machinery Holiday pay = $110.30 per hour, wages & Make up day allowed

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters Deck Equipment Operator, GLF-4 2/12/2014 $53.60 $67.75 $81.90 X X H H H H H D Y (Machineryman/Fireman), (4 equipment units or more), Off Road Trucks, Deck Hand, Tug Engineer, & Crane Maintenance 50 ton capacity and under or Backhoe 115,000 lbs or less, Assistant Tug Operator Holiday pay = $96.05 per hour, wages & fringes Make up day allowed

Subdivision of county All Great Lakes, islands therein, & connecting & tributary waters


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 20 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Operating Engineer Steel Work Forklift, 1 Drum Hoist EN-324-ef 9/5/2014 $58.16 $76.37 $94.58 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Crane w/ 120' boom or longer EN-324-SW120 9/5/2014 $60.86 $80.42 $99.98 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Crane w/ 120' boom or longer w/ Oiler EN-324-SW120-O 9/5/2014 $61.86 $81.92$101.98 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Crane w/ 140' boom or longer EN-324-SW140 9/5/2014 $62.04 $82.19 $102.34 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Crane w/ 140' boom or longer W/ Oiler EN-324-SW140-O 9/5/2014 $63.04 $83.69$104.34 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Boom & Jib 220' or longer EN-324-SW220 9/5/2014 $62.31 $82.60 $102.88 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather


Boom & Jib 300' or longer EN-324-SW300 9/5/2014 $63.81 $84.85 $105.88 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather



Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 21 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Boom & Jib 400' or longer EN-324-SW400 9/5/2014 $65.31 $87.10 $108.88 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather


Crane Operator, Job Mechanic, 3 Drum Hoist & EN-324-SWCO 9/5/2014 $60.50 $79.88 $99.26 H H D H H H D D Y Excavator Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours $47.87 $61.43 $75.00 1,000-1,999 hours $49.81 $64.35 $78.88 2,000-2,999 hours $51.74 $67.24 $82.74 3,000-3,999 hours $53.68 $70.15 $86.62 4,000-4,999 hours $55.62 $73.07 $90.50 5,000 hours $57.56 $75.97 $94.38

Crane Operator w/ Oiler EN-324-SWCO-O 9/5/2014 $61.50 $81.38$101.26 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Compressor or Welder Operator EN-324-SWCW 9/5/2014 $53.15 $68.86 $84.56 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Hoisting Operator, 2 Drum Hoist, & Rubber Tire EN-324-SWHO 9/5/2014 $59.86 $78.92 $97.98 H H D H H H D D Y Backhoe Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Oiler EN-324-SWO 9/5/2014 $51.64 $66.59 $81.54 H H D H H H D D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 22 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Tower Crane & Derrick where work is 50' or EN-324-SWTD50 9/5/2014 $61.59 $81.52$101.44 H H D H H H D D Y more above first level Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Tower Crane & Derrick 50' or more w/ Oiler EN-324-SWTD50-O 9/5/2014 $62.59 $83.02$103.44 H H D H H H D D Y where work station is 50' or more above first Make up day allowed comment 4 10s allowed M-Th with Friday makeup day because of bad weather

Operating Engineer Underground Class I Equipment - Backfiller Tamper, Backhoe, EN-324A2-UC1 10/14/2014 $50.03 $64.42 $78.80 H H H H H H H D Y Batch Plant Operator, Clamshell, Concrete Paver 2 drums or larger, Conveyor Loader Euclid type, Crane (crawler, truck type or pile driving), Dozer, Dragline, Elevating Grader, endloader, gradall, grader, hydro excavator, power shovel, roller asphalt, scraper self- propelled or tractor drawn, side boom tractor, slip form paver, slope paver, trencher over 8 ft. digging capacity, well drilling rig, concrete pump Apprentice Rates: 0-999 hours $40.60 $50.67 $60.74 1,000-1,999 hours $42.04 $52.83 $63.62 2,000-2,999 hours $43.48 $54.99 $66.50 3,000-3,999 hours $44.92 $57.15 $69.38 4,000-4,999 hours $46.36 $59.31 $72.26 5,000-5,999 hours $47.80 $61.48 $75.14

Class II Equipment - Boom Truck, Crusher, EN-324A2-UC2 10/14/2014 $45.14 $57.08 $69.02 H H H H H H H D Y Hoist, Pump 6 inch discharge or larger, side boom tractor, Tractor (pneu-tired other than backhoe or front end loader), Trencher 8 ft. digging capcity and smaller, Vac Truck


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 23 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Class III Equipment - Air Compressors 600 cfm EN-324A2-UC3 10/14/2014 $44.64 $56.33 $68.02 H H H H H H H D Y or larger, Air Compressors 2 or more less than 600 dfm, Boom Truck non-swinging non- powered type boom, Concrete Breaker self- propelled or truck mounted, Concrete paver 1 drum 1/2 yd. or larger, Elevator other than passenger, Pump 4 inch to 6 inch discharge, pumpcrete machine, wagon drill, welding machine or generator 2 or more 300 amp or

Class IV Equipment - Boiler, Concrete Saw 40 EN-324A2-UC4 10/14/2014 $44.36 $55.91 $67.46 H H H H H H H D Y hp or over, curing machine self propelled, end dumps, extend a boom forklift, farm tractor with attachment, finishing machine concrete, firemen, hydraulic pipe pushing machine, mulching equipment, oiler, pumps up to 4 inch discharge, roller other than asphalt, stump remover, sweeper wayne type, trencher, vibrating compaction equipment self propelled 6 ft. wide or over, water wagon.

Painter Painter PT-1803-P 7/16/2014 $34.73 $45.65 $56.56 H H H H H H H D Y 4 10 hour days allowed on consecutive days, Monday-Friday. Make up day allowed M-F for work missed due to holidays or inclement weather. Make up day allowed comment Monday or Friday Apprentice Rates: 1st year $22.90 $27.90 $32.90 2nd year $27.09 $34.18 $41.28 3rd year $30.36 $39.09 $47.82

Pipe and Manhole Rehab General Laborer for rehab work or normal TM247 4/17/2015 $28.20 $38.20 H H H H H H H H N cleaning and cctv work-top man, scaffold man, CCTV assistant, jetter-vac assistant


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 24 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Tap cutter/CCTV Tech/Grout Equipment TM247-2 4/17/2015 $32.70 $44.95 H H H H H H H H N Operator: unit driver and operator of CCTV; grouting equipment and tap cutting equipment

CCTV Technician/Combo Unit Operator: unit TM247-3 4/17/2015 $31.45 $43.07 H H H H H H H H N driver and operator of cctv unit or combo unit in connection with normal cleaning and televising work

Boiler Operator: unit driver and operator of TM247-4 4/17/2015 $33.20 $45.70 H H H H H H H H N steam/water heater units and all ancillary equipment associated

Combo Unit driver & Jetter-Vac Operator TM247-5 4/17/2015 $33.20 $45.70 H H H H H H H H N

Pipe Bursting & Slip-lining Equipment Operator TM247-6 4/17/2015 $34.20 $47.20 H H H H H H H H N

Plasterer Plasterer BR9-7-PL 3/17/2015 $41.29 $53.59 $65.89 H H H H H H H D Y 4 10s allowed M-F Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $32.68 $40.67 $48.67 750-1499 hours $33.91 $42.52 $51.13 1500-2249 hours $35.14 $44.37 $53.59 2500-2999 hours $36.37 $46.21 $56.05 3000-3749 hours $37.60 $48.05 $58.51 3750-4499 hours $38.83 $49.90 $60.97


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 25 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Plasterer PL16-4 10/23/2012 $39.20 $52.36 $65.52 H H H H H H H D N Apprentice Rates: 1st year $29.99 $38.54 $47.10 2nd year $32.62 $42.49 $52.36 3rd year $35.25 $46.44 $57.62

Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder Plumber, Pipefitter, Welder PL-85-Z1 10/14/2013 $49.78 $64.80 $79.81 X X H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed comment 4 tens allowed M-Th; Friday makeup day Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $30.09 $37.60 $45.11 2nd 6 months $32.13 $40.39 $48.65 3rd 6 months $34.17 $43.18 $52.19 4th 6 months $36.22 $45.98 $55.74 5th 6 months $38.26 $48.77 $59.28 6th 6 months $40.31 $51.57 $62.83 7th 6 months $42.35 $54.36 $66.37 8th 6 months $44.41 $57.18 $69.94 9th & 10th 6 months $46.45 $59.96 $73.48


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 26 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Roofer Commercial Roofer RO-149-MMA 8/15/2008 $38.61 $50.72 $62.82 H H H H H H H D Y Straight time is not to exceed ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Make up day allowed Apprentice Rates: Apprentice 1 $23.23 $27.64 $32.06 Apprentice 2 $25.14 $30.51 $35.88 Apprentice 3 $27.09 $33.44 $39.78 Apprentice 4 $29.00 $36.30 $43.60 Apprentice 5 $30.92 $39.18 $47.44 Apprentice 6 $32.83 $42.04 $51.26

Sewer Relining Class I-Operator of audio visual CCTV system SR-I 11/3/2014 $42.76 $57.75 $72.74 H H H H H H H D N including remote in-ground cutter and other equipment used in conjunction with CCTV

Class II-Operator of hot water heaters and SR-II 11/3/2014 $41.23 $55.46 $69.68 H H H H H H H D N circulation system; water jetters; and vacuum and mechanical debris removal systems and those assisting.


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 27 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker SHM-7-3 9/25/2014 $46.28 $59.14 $72.00 H H D H H H D D Y 4 10s allowed as consecutive days, M-Th or T-F Apprentice Rates: 1st 6 months $15.19 $20.34 $25.48 2nd 6 months $17.74 $23.53 $29.31 3rd 6 months $19.56 $25.99 $32.42 4th 6 months $22.09 $29.16 $36.24 5th 6 months $23.90 $31.61 $39.33 6th 6 months $26.45 $34.81 $43.17 7th 6 months $28.26 $37.26 $46.26 8th 6 months $30.80 $40.45 $50.09

Sprinkler Fitter Sprinkler Fitter SP 669 9/17/2009 $46.51 $61.99 $77.47 H H H H H H H D Y Make up day allowed Apprentice Rates: Class 1 & 2 $23.44 $31.31 $39.17 Class 3 $29.35 $37.75 $46.15 Class 4 $30.93 $40.12 $49.31 Class 5 $35.50 $45.47 $55.45 Class 6 $37.07 $47.83 $58.59 Class 7 $38.65 $50.20 $61.75 Class 8 $40.22 $52.55 $64.89 Class 9 $41.79 $54.91 $68.03 Class 10 $43.36 $57.27 $71.17


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 28 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Tile Finisher Tile Finisher BR9-7-TF 3/17/2015 $28.75 $38.05 $47.35 H H H H H H H D Y 4 10s allowed M-F Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $22.24 $28.29 $34.33 750-1499 hours $23.17 $29.68 $36.19 1500-2249 hours $24.10 $31.07 $38.05 2250-2999 hours $25.03 $32.47 $39.91 3000-3749 hours $25.96 $33.87 $41.77 3750-4499 hours $26.89 $35.26 $43.63

Tile, Marble and Terrazzo Tile, Marble, Mosaic and Terrazzo Setter BR9-7-TL 4/14/2015 $36.80 $48.61 $60.41 H H H H H H H D Y 4 10s allowed M-F Apprentice Rates: 0-749 hours $28.54 $36.21 $43.89 750-1499 hours $29.72 $37.99 $46.25 1500-2249 hours $30.90 $39.75 $48.61 2250-2999 hours $32.08 $41.53 $50.97 3000-3749 hours $33.26 $43.29 $53.33 3750-4499 hours $34.44 $45.07 $55.69

Truck Driver of all trucks of 8 cubic yd capacity or over TM-RB2 8/8/2013 $41.92 $37.85 H H H H H H H H Y

of all trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or less TM-RB2A 8/8/2013 $41.82 $37.70 H H H H H H H H Y (except dump trucks of 8 cubic yard capacity or over, tandem axle trucks, transit mix and semis, euclid type equipment, double bottoms and low boys)


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 29 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== on euclid type equipment TM-RB2B 8/8/2013 $41.35 $38.08 H H H H H H H H Y

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class I Construction Laborer LAUC-Z4-1 10/30/2014 $32.52 $42.35 $52.17 X X X X X X X D Y Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.17 $35.83 $43.47 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.04 $37.13 $45.21 2,001-3,000 work hours $29.91 $38.43 $46.95 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.65 $41.05 $50.43

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class II Mortar and material mixer, concrete form man, LAUC-Z4-2 10/30/2014 $32.65 $42.54 $52.43 X X X X X X X D Y signal man, well point man, manhole, headwall and catch basin builder, guard rail builders, headwall, seawall, breakwall, dock builder and fence erector. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.27 $35.97 $43.67 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.14 $37.28 $45.41 2,001-3,000 work hours $30.02 $38.60 $47.17 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.77 $41.23 $50.67


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 30 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class III Air, gasoline and electric tool operator, vibrator LAUC-Z4-3 10/30/2014 $32.76 $42.71 $52.65 X X X X X X X D Y operator, drillers, pump man, tar kettle operator, bracers, rodder, reinforced steel or mesh man (e.g. wire mesh, steel mats, dowel bars, etc.), cement finisher, welder, pipe jacking and boring man, wagon drill and air track operator and concrete saw operator (under 40 h.p.), windlass and tugger man, and directional boring man. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.35 $36.09 $43.83 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.23 $37.41 $45.59 2,001-3,000 work hours $30.11 $38.73 $47.35 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.88 $41.39 $50.89

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class IV Trench or excavating grade man. LAUC-Z4-4 10/30/2014 $32.83 $42.81 $52.79 X X X X X X X D Y Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.40 $36.17 $43.93 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.29 $37.51 $45.71 2,001-3,000 work hours $30.17 $38.83 $47.47 3,001-4,000 work hours $31.94 $41.48 $51.01

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class V Pipe Layer LAUC-Z4-5 10/30/2014 $32.95 $42.99 $53.03 X X X X X X X D Y Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $28.49 $36.31 $44.11 1,001-2,000 work hours $29.38 $37.64 $45.89 2,001-3,000 work hours $30.28 $38.99 $47.69 3,001-4,000 work hours $32.06 $41.66 $51.25


Official 2015 Prevailing Wage Rates for State Funded Projects Issue Date: 4/30/2015 Contract must be awarded by: 7/29/2015 Page 31 of 31 Classification Last Straight Time and a Double Overtime Name Description Updated Hourly Half Time Provision =================================================================================================== Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VI Grouting man, top man assistant, audio visual LAUC-Z4-6 10/30/2014 $30.17 $38.82 $47.47 X X X X X X X D Y television operations and all other operations in connection with closed circuit television inspection, pipe cleaning and pipe relining work & the installation and repair of water service pipe and appurtenances. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $26.41 $33.19 $39.95 1,001-2,000 work hours $27.16 $34.31 $41.45 2,001-3,000 work hours $27.91 $35.43 $42.95 3,001-4,000 work hours $29.42 $37.70 $45.97

Underground Laborer Open Cut, Class VII Restoration laborer, seeding, sodding, planting, LAUC-Z4-7 10/30/2014 $28.51 $36.33 $44.15 X X X X X X X D Y cutting, mulching and topsoil grading and the restoration of property such as replacing mail boxes, wood chips, planter boxes, flagstones etc. Apprentice Rates: 0-1,000 work hours $25.16 $31.31 $37.45 1,001-2,000 work hours $25.83 $32.31 $38.79 2,001-3,000 work hours $26.50 $33.32 $40.13 3,001-4,000 work hours $27.84 $35.33 $42.81


PROJECT MANUAL

2015 BOND PROJECTS FOR:

ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS BUSH ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

CRAMER JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL

GARBER HIGH SCHOOL

VERELLEN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

ESSEXVILLE, MICHIGAN

KLDG Project No. 2015001

APRIL 2015

ARCHITECT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER

K L DESIGN GROUP, LLC SPENCE BROTHERS

726 ABBOT ROAD 417 Mc COSKRY STREET

EAST LANSING, MICHIGAN 48823 SAGINAW, MICHIGAN 48601

PHONE: (989) 860-4382 PHONE: (989) 752-0400

FAX: (517) 337-7115 FAX: (989) 752-8769


ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS

ESSEXVILLE, MICHIGAN PROJECT NO. 2015001

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

PROJECT MANUAL

AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRONIC FILES

DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGES

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01230 ALTERNATES 2

01270 UNIT PRICES 1

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 4

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 5 – METALS

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 3

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3

06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 4

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07540 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 8

07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 4

07841 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 4

07920 JOINT SEALANTS 4

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

09111 NONLOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING 2

09250 GYPSUM BOARD 4

09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 3

09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 5

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10505 METAL LOCKERS 5




TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 2

15060 MINOR MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 2

15121 PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION 3

15135 GAGES AND METERS 2

15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 4

15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 2

15260 PIPING INSULATION 4

15280 EQUIPMENT INSULATION 4

15510 HYDRONIC PIPING 5

15515 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 2

15540 HYDRONIC PUMPS 4

15545 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 3

15561 HOT WATER BOILERS 7

15575 BREECHINGS 3

15990 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 5

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 3

16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 2

16111 CONDUIT 3

16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 2

16130 BOXES 2

16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2

16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 2

16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1

16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 2

16482 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 11

DIVISION 17 – TECHNOLOGY

NOT APPLICABLE

END OF SECTION


ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS PROJECT NO. 2015001


AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRONIC FILES PART 1 - GENERAL

A. As a service to bidders, contractors, subcontractors, vendors, material suppliers and others needing electronic copies of drawing files, the Architect will provide CAD files in the form of a CD-ROM in accordance with the following policy: 1. By acceptance it is understood and agreed that the data and medium being supplied is to be used only

for the project referenced. 2. It is further understood and agreed that the undersigned will hold KL Design Group, LLC harmless

and indemnify KL Design Group, LLC from all claims, liabilities, losses, etc., including attorney's fees arising out of the use or misuse of the transferred items.

3. It is understood and agreed that the items transmitted are prepared from CAB files current at the time

of preparation. All files are AutoCAD 2013. 4. This information does not waive the need to verify and review current filed conditions and the status

of Addenda and/or Bulletin documentation. 5. As a record of information to be transmitted KL Design Group, LLC will prepare a duplicate back-up

for its files, which may be electronic or hard-copy. 6. Compensation for providing this material will be as follows:

a. Base Fee of $250 for 1 to 3 drawings. b. Base Fee of $500 for 4 to 10 drawings. c. For each, additional drawing after 10 the fee is $40 per drawing (i.e. 11 drawings = $540).

7. Payment must be provided along with a signed copy of the Release Letter before files be released.

1.2 REQUEST PROCEDURE

A. To receive files, the attached Release Letter must be completed in full and submitted to the Construction Manager to be forwarded to the Project Manager at KL Design Group, LLC.

1. An original signed copy of the Release Letter must be submitted; faxed or emailed copies will not be

accepted. 2. Upon remittance of the signed Release Letter and Fee, allow five working days for processing. 3. No email transmissions of documents will be provided.


ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS PROJECT NO. 2015001


AVAILABILITY OF ELECTRONIC FILES Date: Firm Requesting Files: Name: Company: Address: City, State, Zip Code: RE: Letter of Authorization for CAD File Transfers. Project Name: KL Design Group, LLC Bid Pack No.: Dear Sir: Per your request, KL Design Group, LLC will transmit the requested CAD files in the form of CD-ROM upon receipt of an original signed copy of this letter with conditions of agreement as stated.

1. By acceptance it is understood and agreed that the data and medium being supplied is to be used only for the project referenced.

2. It is further understood and agreed that the undersigned will hold KL Design Group, LLC harmless and indemnify KL Design Group, LLC from all claims, liabilities, losses, etc., including attorney's fees arising out of the use or misuse of the transferred items.

3. It is understood and agreed that the items transmitted are prepared from CAD files current at the time of preparation. All files are AutoCAD 2013.

4. This information does not waive the need to verify and review current field conditions and the status of Addenda and/or Bulletin documentation.

5. As a record of information to be transmitted, we will prepare a duplicate back-up for our files, which may be electronic or hard-copy.

6. Compensation for providing this material will be as follows: Base fee of $250 for 1 to 3 drawings and a Base Fee of $500 for 4 to 10 drawings; for each additional drawing after 10 the fee is $40 per drawing (i.e. 11 drawings = $540). Payment must be provided along with a signed copy of this form before files will be released. Please remit to KL Design Group, LLC and allow five working days for processing.

Fee: $_________________________________ Drawings: _________________________________________ Signed: __________________________________ Printed Name/Title: _________________________________ Firm Requesting: Phone: Fax:

To be completed by KL Design Group, LLC: Released (Signed By): ______________________________________ KL Design Group, LLC Printed Name/Title: ________________________________________ Date: _______________________________ END OF SECTION

2015 BOND PROJECTS FOR: ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS ESSEXVILLE, MICHIGAN PROJECT NO. 2015001

ALTERNATES 01230 - 1

SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost for each alternate is the net addition to the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into

the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items

incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract/Purchase Order, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections

referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Bush Elementary School - Alternate No.B1: (Add Alternate) 1. Provide and install fifteen (15) corridor lockers along the North wall of Corridor 163 as shown on plan view 7/B-A1. Provide a locker base for the additional lockers as shown in detail 5/B-A1. See specification section 10505 for locker requirements


ALTERNATES 01230 - 2

. B. Bush Elementary School - Alternate No. B2: (Add Alternate) 1. Provide aluminum framed portable bench assemblies with 2” by 10” seat planks in Corridors 135, 154 amd 164, similar to model 9B23 by Belson Outdoors (1-800-323-5664) in the following quantities: a. Corridor 135: Eleven (11) 6’-0” long bench assemblies. b. Corridor 154: Eleven (11) 6’-0” long bench assemblies c. Corridor 164: Nine (9) 6’-0” long bench assemblies . Exact locations to be determined in the field . C. Bush Elementary School - Alternate No. B3: (Add or Deduct Alternate) 1. Provide and install a Cleaver Brooks Clean Fire style boiler system for BLR-1 and BLR-2. See Mechanical Equipment Schedule on drawing B-M0.1for further information. Provide pricing for all components necessary for a complete and operating system. D. Cramer Jr. High School - Alternate No. C1: (Add Alternate) 1. Provide and isnstall an additional ninty-eight (98) corridor lockers and corresponding locker base as shown in detail 2/C-A1. See specification section 10505 for locker requirements at Cramer Jr. High School. Exact locations to be determined in the field.. Figure in the pricing to use eleven (11) finished end panels . E. Cramer Jr. High School – Alternate No. C2: (Add or Deduct Alternate) 1. In lieu of providing seventy-five single tier lockers in Corridors 103 and 104, indicate the cost to change the seventy-five lockers to double tier. See specification section 10505 for additional; locker requirements F. Cramer Jr. High School – Alternate No. C3: (Add Alternate) 1. Provide a cost to remove the existing built-in combination locks on (334) existing lockers and provide and install a new built-in combination lock on the (334) existing lockers similar to Maste Llock 1630 as specified for new lockers. See specification section 10505 for additional requirements . G. Verellen Elementary School – Alternate No. V1: (Add Alternate) 1. Provide and install the Coat Cubbie and Storage Unit assembly as shown in details 6/V-A1, 7/V-A1 and 8/V-A1 for the classroom indicated on the Master Plan. See specification 06402 for additional requirements..

END OF SECTION 01230

2015 BOND PROJECTS FOR ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SCHOOLS ESSEXVILLE, MICHIGAN PROJECT NO. 2015001

UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:.

2. Division 7 Section for product requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes.

B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Method of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves "use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor. D. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE.

A. Unite Price No. 1: (For Bush Elementary and Garber HS)

1. Description: Removal of existing wet roof insulation and replacement with new roof insulation. Replacement is to be based on 1-1/2" thickness as indicated in Specification Section 07540.

2. Unit of Measurement: Per square foot. This is above and beyond base bid requirements.

. END OF SECTION 01270


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 1

SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 3. Patching and repairs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption of utility services, use of elevator and stairs, and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.

B. Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Regulator Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NPPA 241 D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately

notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted



. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials or as specified in individual sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective

demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and

salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or

design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction photographs or preconstruction videotapes.

G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with

selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other pails of building.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary

Facilities and Controls".



B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to

people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to

preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods

least designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of

building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match

new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.



3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS

A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations.

B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry

patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to

remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. D. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend

one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken, surface

containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. E. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform

appearance.

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition

operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing items to be Removed: See Drawings. B. Existing Items to be Removed and Salvaged: Remove and turn over to the Owner the following items:

1. See Drawings. C. Existing Items to be Removed and Reinstalled: See Drawings for items to be removed and reinstalled.



METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Steel Framing and Supports for Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in this Section by same firm that fabricated them.

C. Quality welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the following:

1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel"

D. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.

B. Steel Plates, Angles, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36

C. Welding Rods: Select in accordance with AWS Specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.

2.2 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664.



2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL

A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

B. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

C. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.

B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for “Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".

B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Stripe paint all edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.



B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correctly welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

A. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood cants. 3. Wood nailers..

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated. 1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:

1. Treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each

piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moister content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal (38-mm

actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 3. Comply with “Code Plus” provisions in APA Form No. E30K, “APA Design/Construction Guide:

Residential and Commercial”.



2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC’s Board of Review. 1. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through,

contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg/cu.

m). After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection

with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or

concrete. 3. Wood framing member less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.

C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservative to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m).

D. Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, provide materials that comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure

to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664, for lumber and ASTM D 5516, for plywood.

2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 4. Use Interior Type A High Temperature (HT), unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stub, or No. 2 or better grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NGLA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide

fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.



2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM

A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60

(Z180) coating designation. 1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. c. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. d. KC Metals Products, Inc. e. Silver Metal Products, Inc. f. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.

2. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.

3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer’s published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

C. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Apply field treatment complying with A/VPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the

following: 1. CABO NBR-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 2304.9.1, “Fastening Schedule,” for Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Fastening in the Michigan

Building Code. 4. Table 2304.9.1, “Fastening Schedule,” in the Michigan Building Code. 5. Table 602.3(1), “Fastener Schedule for Structural Members.”

D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler.

E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA’s “Manual for Wood Frame Construction,” unless otherwise indicated. F. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, “APA Design/Construction Guide;

Residential & Commercial,” for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with “Code Plus” provisions in above-referenced guide.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1

SECTION 06402 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate coat “cubbie”/ storage cabinets.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips required

installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment

devices, and other components. C. Samples:

1. Plastic-laminates, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Melamine panels, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.

D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI’s “Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards” for grades of interior architectural woodwork construction, finishes, if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements

before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish

dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in “Project Conditions” Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHAA 135.4. 2. Particleboard: Grade M-3 47# density engineered particleboard for all cabinet components. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one

of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. c. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2. Types and locations of High-Pressure Laminate: a. High-Pressure Laminate: GP-28 at exposed surfaces, doors, and drawer fronts b. High-Pressure Laminate: GP-50 at countertops. c. Thermally fused melamine laminate at concealed surfaces.

D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: PVA adhesive, set under pressure, or contact cement.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural woodwork except for items specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware”.

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing. D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.

1. One pull shall be located at the centerline of the drawer, regardless of width, to ensure ease of operation and maximize drawer slide life.

2. Manufacturers standard color offerings. E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B0314L.

1. Door catches are not used with self-closing hinges. Base and wall cabinets shall have a 7 pound magnetic catch. Tall cabinets shall have heavy-duty spring loaded roller, with molded plastic bumper mounted at door bottom.

F. Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1. A 5 mm diameter row hole pattern 32 mm (1-1/4 inch) on center shall be bored in cabinet ends for adjustable

shelves. This row role pattern shall also serve for hardware mounting and replacement and/or relocation of cabinet components.

2. Shelf supports shall be injected molded clear plastic, with a double pin engagement 32 mm on center and shall have ¾-inch and 1-inch anti-tip locking tabs..



G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

H. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s stand finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or led expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesive that contain urea formaldehyde.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Fabricate to AWI Premium quality standards. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal

edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:

1. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. 2. Grade: Premium.

C. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or rough-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

D. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

E. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles and details indicated. F. Complete fabrications, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before

shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws,

bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify the various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on shop drawings before disassembling for shipment.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. B. Grade: Premium. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Constructions: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Exterior Surfaces: All door and drawer fronts, finished end panels, wall cabinet bottoms, and exposed exterior backs shall be surfaced with 0.028-inch thick high pressure decorative laminate conforming to NEMA LD3-1995, GP-28.

2. All exterior vertical high-pressure laminate panels shall be balanced with textured 0.020-inch thick high-pressure cabinet liner conforming to NEMA Standard LD-3-1995, CL-20. Surface texture shall be similar to exterior finish. Color shall match interior.

E. PVC Edges: 1. All door and drawer front edging shall be 3 mm PVC. PVC shall be applied utilizing hot melt adhesive and

radiused by automatic trimmers. Hand tool applying and trimming of PVC shall not be allowed. Colors shall be from manufacturer’s full range of options.



2. Exposed edges including cabinet body and other exposed components shall be colored through 0.020-inch PVC. Color to be PVC Manufacturer’s compatible color match to the selected exterior laminate color. PVC shall be chip and crack resistant applied with hot melt adhesive.

F. Materials for Semi-Exposed Surface: 1. Thermally fused laminate interior which exceeds NEMA LD-3-1995 or GP-28 Performance. 2. Interior surfaces in open cabinets, behind doors, drawer boxes, backs, and unfinished ends shall be laminated

with a thermally fused laminate. All panels shall be of “BALANCED” construction. Fast cycle thermally fused melamine foil or polyester surfaced panels or other surface types that do not meet these requirements are not acceptable. Colors will be manufacturers standard options.

G. Colors, Patterns and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect’s selections from laminate manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes in the following

categories: a. Solid colors. b. Wood grains. c. Patterns.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,

concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips..

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or

soiled areas.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Only the major cabinet items are listed in the Schedule. The drawings indicate location, quantity, and type required. 1. Coat “cubbies” / storage unit; see Alternate V1.



THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-1

SECTION 07540 – THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Mechanically attached membrane roofing system. 2. Roof Insulation. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Walkway pads. 5. Gypsum roof boards (as required by roofing manufacturer). 6. Spot replacement of wet/defective insulation

B. Related section include the following: 1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood nailers, curbs, cants and blocking. 2. Division 7 Section “manufactured Roof Specialties” for metal roof edge gravel stops.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: Of the following products.

1. 12 by 12 inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. 12-inch length of metal termination bars. 3. 12-inch length of battens. 4. Fasteners of each type, length and finish.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the roofing system manufacturer certifying the Installer is approved, authorized or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roof Manufacturer certifying that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the “Performance Requirements” Article. Upon request, submit evidence of meeting requirements.

F. Inspection reports: Copy of roofing system manufacturer’s inspection report of completed roofing installation.

G. Maintenance data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer’s

products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by

roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-

response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG< or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original container with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.



B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and

within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials form direct sunlight. 1.Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stored shelf life.

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according to manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer’s warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing Membrane:

a. Tremco b. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. c. Firestone Building Products, d. Versico Roofing System e. Johns Manville 3. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: a. Insulation manufacturer as recommended by the thermoplastic membrane manufacturer in order to provide a total system warranty. 2.2 COMPOUNDED THERMOPLACTIC SHEET

A. Compounded Thermoplastic Sheet: Uniform, polyester-reinforced flexible sheet compounded resins, plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers, and pigments, of the following material, thickness, backing, exposed face color, and physical properties: 1. Sheet Material: Reinforced thermoplastic membrane. 2. Sheet Thickness: 40 mills, nominal, minimum 3. Exposed Face Color: White; except Grey on sloped roof areas at Bush Elementary School 4. Manufacturer is to provide written documentation tha their membrane meets or exceeds all

industry recommended testing and approvals. a. Indicate the testing/approval guidelines

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.



1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet VOC limits of authorities having

jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer’s standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement,

thickness, and color as sheet membrane material. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard bonding adhesive for membrane and solvent-based

bonding adhesive for base flashings. D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer’s standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plated meeting corrosion-resistance

provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

F. Expansion Joints: Membrane manufacturer’s approved expansion joints for the width and conditions shown on the Drawings.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, performed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside comer sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination teglets, cover strips, slip sheet, and other accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.

H. Breather Vent: 2-way breather vent per manufacturer’s recommendations to provide total system warranty.

I. Provide wood nailers at all perimeter edges to accommodate additional roof insulation and metal edge system.

J. Provide wood nailers at all perimeter edges to accommodate roof insulation. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements, selected from manufacturer’s standard sizes and of thickness indicated. 1. Install extruded polystyrene (XPS) and polyisocyamirate insulation mechanically attaches

and per manufacturer’s recommendations over existing roof system. 2. Provide preformed, tapered insulation boards where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate

with the following taper: a. All of the tapered insulation required to construct the saddles, crickets and tapered edge

strips, that are on the drawings, shall be added on top of the base 3-inch roof insulation. Tapered Insulation shall have a minimum taper of 1/4 –inch per foot.

3. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

B. Extruded polystyrene (XPS) Fan Fold-P (Crush Fold): Rigid, extruded polystyrene (XPS) core wrapped with tough facers to create a durable water resistant board. Thermal resistance, R -1.5 (ASTM C 518 @ 75degrees); Compressive Strength, 15psi (ASTM D 1521); Water Vapor Permeance, 0.06 perm (ASTM E96); Water Absorption, 0.6% (ASTM C 272; Fire Characteristics, flame spread 10 and smoke development 45 – 140 (ASTM E 84 / UL 723) 1. Three-eights (3/8”) inch thick. See roof plan notes. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation(Wet insulation replacement areas): Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate thermal insulation with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Replacement for wet roof insulation shall be in layers of 1-1/2 inch thickness to match the total thickness removed, unless noted otherwise

D. Provide performed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to provide positive drainage. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatible with sheet roof material.



B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plated meeting corrosion-resistance

provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Primer: Insulation primer by insulation adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations 2.6 WALKWAYS

A. Walkway Pads: Install manufacturer’s walkway pads at service side of all mechanical units. Field verify quantity and locations.

2.7 GLASS-MAT GYPSUM ROOF BOARD

A. Glass-mat Gypsum Roof Board: Glass mat faced gypsum roof board with water resistant core complying with the following requirements: 1. Thickness:1/2 inch 2. Composition: Glass mat faced gypsum board panel with water resistant core 3. Size: 4 x 8 feet, nominal 4. Edge: Square 5. Fire Resistace: a. Flame-Spread 0, Smoke Developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM 84. Non-

combustible wen tested in accordance with ASTM E136 6. Product: Densdeck Barrier/Substrate by Georgia-Pacific. 7. Location: If required by roofing membrane manufacturer to meet exterior fire-test

exposure requirements. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with, requirements.

B. Verify that roof opening and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position.

C. Verify that wood curbs and nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses of insulation required.

D. Do not proceed “with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. E. Roofing contractor to include 8,000 sq. ft. allowance at Bush Elementary School and 15,000 sq.

ft. allowance at Garber HS for spot replacement of wet/defective insulation in base bid. See note on Roof Plan.Exact locations to be determined in the field.

3.2 PREPARTATION

A. Remove existing membrane roof, roof insulation and/or BUR stones where noted on Roof Plan. Fasteners are to be backed out of existing roof deck.

B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

C. Prevent materials form migrating onto surfaces of other construction. D. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water for

entering completed sections of the roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.



B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions for installing roof

insulation. C. Install Densdeck subsrate board and, if required by roofing membrane manufacturer to meet the

exterior fire-test exposure requirements. Mechanically attach to meet Factory Mutual Approval Guide for 1-90 rating. 1. Comers: 8’ x 8’ – one (1) fastener per each one (1) square feet. 2. Perimeters: 8’ in from edge-one (1) fasteners per each two (2) square feet. 3. Field: one (1) fastener per each three (3) square feet.

D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. E. Install 3/8 inch thick insulation under areas of roofing as noted on roof plan, unless noted

otherwise. Replace wet insulation with 1-1/2 inch thick insulation (as specified), unless noted otherwise.Where overall insulation thickness is greater than 2 inches (50 mm), install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

F. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof.

G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

H. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gapes exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections and penetrations.

3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 1. Install sheet according to ASTMD 5082

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing membranes and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Mechanically fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of

roofing membrane according to manufacturer’s written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of roofing membrane. 2. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet

requirements. G. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing

membrane in place with clamping ring. H. In-Splice Attachment; Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal

battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field-splice seam.

I. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing. J. Cover exposed screw points in scheduled open structure areas with screw point covers

.



3.5 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings, performed flashing, expansion joints and accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at require rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with, sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end

laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars. F. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealer and seal exposed edges

of sheet flashing terminations 3.6 SEAM INSTALLATION

A. Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer’s written Instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Weld Method: Hot air, as standard with roofing system manufacturer.

B. Repair tears, vids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. C. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam caulk to seal cut edges of

sheet membrane.

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to

substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or

inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements



PART 4 – INSTALLER’S WARRANTY 4.1 ROOFING INSTALLER’S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS ____________________ of ________________________________ herein called the “Roofing Installer”, has performed roofing and associated work (“work”) on the following project:

1. Owner: ____________________________________________________________ 2. Address: ___________________________________________________________ 3. Building Name/Type: _________________________________________________ 4. Address: ___________________________________________________________ 5. Area of Work: _______________________________________________________ 6. Acceptance Date: _____________________________________________________ 7. Warranty Period: _____________________________________________________ 8. Expiration Date: ______________________________________________________

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set

forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the

building, and to building contents, caused by: a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding __________ mph; c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive

deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment

supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance

personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by the Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing showing reasonable cause for claim, that said



alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner’s General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this __________ day of

_______________________, 20 .

1. Authorized Signature: 2. Name: 3. Title:


2015 BOND PROJECTS FOR: ESSEXVILLE-HAMPTON PUBLIC SWCHOOLS ESSEXVILLE, MICHIGAN PROJECT NO. 2015001

MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 1

SECTION 07710 – MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gravel Stops. 2. Copings. 3. Counterflashings. 4. Related sections include the following:

a. Division 7 Section “Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing” for roof membrane and flashing. b. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealant” for field applied sealants.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. FMG Listing: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings that are listed in FMG’s “Approval Guide” and approved for Windstorm Classification, Class I-90. Identify materials with FMG markings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs.

field-assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of manufactured roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes. Submit

samples in 8 inch length. D. Product Test Reports: Verifying compliance of roof edge flashings with performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The designs for roof edge flashing and counterflashings and reglets are based on

the products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.2 EXPOSED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated, finished as follows: 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C122C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals;

Chemical Finish: acid-chrome-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat, thermoeured system consisting of

specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride reside by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.



B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B221 M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, finished as follows: 1. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited as specified

below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer’s written instructions. a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat, thermoeured system consisting of

specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

2.3 CONCEALED METALS

A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished.

C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized Steel Sheet): ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation structural quality.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized,

heavy bodied for hook-type expansion joints with limited movement. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (04-mm) dry film

thickness per coat. Provide inter-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

E. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and project conditions, and formulated to withstand minimum 90-lb/sq. ft. wind-uplift force.

2.5 GRAVEL STOPS

A. Gravel Stops: Manufactured-one piece, formed-metal gravel stop hi section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, continuous hold-down cleat, and concealed splice plated of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide mitered and welded or soldered corner units. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Architectural Products Co. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Cheney Flashing Company. d. Hickman, W.P. Company. e. Mercliant & Evans, Inc. f. Metal-Era, Inc. g. MM Systems Corporation. h. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: a. Aluminum 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

2.6 COPINGS

A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m), concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps, mitered corner units, and end cap units. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Architectural Products Co.



b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Cheney Flashing Company. d. Hickman, W.P. Company. e. Mercliant & Evans, Inc. f. Metal-Era, Inc. g. MM Systems Corporation. h. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

2. Coping Caps: Snap-on, fabricated from the following exposed metal: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.2 mm) thick.

3. Coping Cap Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range. 4. Corners: Continuously welded. 5. Snap-On Coping Anchor Plates: concealed, galvanized steel sheet, 12 inches (300 mm) wide, 0.028 inch (0.7

mm) thick, with integral cleats. 6. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized steel sheet.

2.7 COUNTERFLASHINGS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Cheney Flashing Company. 2. Fry Reglet Corporation. 3. Hickman, W.P. Company. 4. Keystone Flashing Company. 5. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 6. Metal-Era, Inc. 7. MM Systems Corporation.

B. Counterflashings: Manufactured units in lengths not exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m) designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joint lapped, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick. 2. Counterflashing wind-resistant clips.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembles or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems. 1. Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks.



D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surface to be covered before manufacture.

E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no unplanned joints within 18 inches (450 mm) of corners or intersections.

F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than ¾ inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

G. Seal joints with silicone sealant as required by manufacturer of roofing specialties.

3.2 ROOF EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, can dams, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor roof edging to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements.

3.3 COPING INSTALLATION

A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor copings to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements.

1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges into continuous cleats anchored to substrate at manufacturer’s recommended spacing.

3.4 COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashings. Extend counterflashings 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashings. Lap counterflashings joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and be with elastomeric butyl sealant.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as manufactured roof specialties are installed. On

completion of installation, clean finishing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace manufactured roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish

touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 – THROUGH-PENTRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetrations firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than

that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings

indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

3. L-Rated Systems: Where through-penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524 cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C).

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-

penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to possible

loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a

qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency’s illustration for a

particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer’s fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, “Approval of Firestop Contractors.”

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems I Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and

inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in “Part 1 Performance Requirements” Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc. 2. Grace, W.R. & Co. – Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 8. Specified Technologies, Inc. 9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. 11. USG Corporation.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration, firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article. Use only components specified by through penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference to the types of materials described in this



Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized

to fit specified diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or

silicone compounds. E. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and

lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. F. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled wit a combination of

mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additive. G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to

produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. H. Silicone Sealants: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade

indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag

formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer’s written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 “Performance Requirements” Article and with firestop system manufacturer’s written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and

other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces

that are flush with adjoining finishes.


A. Inspecting Agent: Contractor will engage in independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.



3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty.

B. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty.

C. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

D. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags.

E. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips.

F. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty.

G. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following:

a. Latex sealant. H. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants:

1. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent wrap strips. c. Firestop device. d. Intumescent composite sheet.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications, including those specified by reference to this Section and following applications: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Other joints as indicated. 2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.. b. Other joints as indicated.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½-inch (13-mm)

wide joints formed between two 6-inch (150-mm) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Preconstruction field test reports. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. E. Product certificates or test reports.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 or manufacturer’s standard test method to determine whether priming or other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test the adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.

C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint

sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer’s Warranty: Installer’s standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



B. Special Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard for in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 Articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

E. Low-Modulus Neutral-Curing Polyurethane Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Available Products:

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. b. Tremco; Dymonic. c. Tremco; Vulkem 921.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, color anodic aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, limestone, plastic, tile, wood.

F. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following: 1. Available Products:

a. GE Silicones; Siliglaze H SCS2800. b. Tremco; Tremsil 600. c. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. d. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 895.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.



a. Coated glass, aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, color anodic aluminum, galvanized steel, brick, limestone, marble, granite, plastic, tile, wood.

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. B. Available Products:

1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 3. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for application indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings (Backer Rod): ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), polyurethane foam rod, oversized 20 to 50 percent larger than joint width, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Type: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant.

a. Clean, porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particle remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or

leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on

preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer’s written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: All dissimilar materials are to be caulked. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable

to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce

cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with

dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant

movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants

according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smear adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1. Joint-Sealant: Low- and/or Medium-Modulus neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range.

. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.

1. Joint-Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturers full color range.



NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111-1

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL

3.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, etc.). B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for interior gypsum wall board assemblies.

3.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: a. Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.

2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, as depth indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to

interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

(1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. (2) Superior Metal Triin; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

B. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." C. Fiat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-

mm-) wide flanges, 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch (1.73-mm) thick,

galvanized steel. E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound

transmission. Asymmetrical or hat shaped, with face attached to single flange by a slotted leg (web) or


NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111-2

attached to two flanges by slotted or expanded metal legs. F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-

mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness

of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64I/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1,59-mm-) diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies:

Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation ship between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track

section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at eachjamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm)

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions:. Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. C. Direct Fuiiing:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 ram) o.c.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1

SECTION 09250 – GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Abuse resistant interior gypsum board.

B. Related sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” for fire rated assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.

2. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for acoustical sealants installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board and contact points between dissimilar materials and gypsum board.

3. Division 9 Section “Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing” for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board.

4. Division 9 Section “Interior Painting” for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those testing in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subjected to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. G-P Gypsum. b. National Gypsum Company. c. USG Corporation.

B. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufacturer to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetrations (impact resistance) than standard type and type X gypsum board.



1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Product: Very High Impact.

a. United States Gypsum Co.; Fiberock Brand Panel VHI Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. 4. Location: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Materials: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel

sheet. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound, use at exposed panel edges. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other

compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled, panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type

taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use

setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer’s written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 20 CFR 59, Subpart D

(EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screw: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

D. Acoustical Sealant:

1. All other Panel Products: To comply as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” and with manufacturer’s recommendations.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16

inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors.

Provide ¼- to ½-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edge with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

E. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end or each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Abuse-Resistant Type x: Provide abuse-resistant gypsum board at partitions unless noted otherwise.

B. Single-Layer Applications: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated

or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multi-Layer Applications: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum boards indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to

framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 4. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound, use at exposed panel edges.

3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply open joints over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas. 2. Level 4: For gypsum board surface where wall coverings and flat paints are specified.

a. Primer and its application to surface are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 3. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.



E. For Level 5 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories; and apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. For skim coat, use joint compound specified for third coat, or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defect, tool marks, and ridges and ready for decoration.

F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), and finish (third) coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface with few visual defects and ready for decoration.

G. For Level 1 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or

irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface

contamination and discoloration.



RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1

SECTION 09653 – RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer’s standard-size Samples, but not less

than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 def F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.



2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE

A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. 4. Endura. 5. Johnsonite. 6. Musson, R.C. Rubber Co. 7. Roppe Corporation. 8. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.

B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). F. Height: 4 inches (102 mm) G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer’s standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed. I. Inside Corners: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement base formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other

Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer’s written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil,

or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance

of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be

installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After

cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixture in rooms and areas where base is required.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal

and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer’s

recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum length possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug it to substrate.

3.4 CLEAING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not was surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and

placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.



INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-1

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation aud the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Gypsum board

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product Indicated. B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

1. Submit samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each sample. 4. Labeleach sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicted.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a recoid of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint

system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required,

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART2-PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are

used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) (Sherman-Williams). 3. ICI Paints (ICI Paints). 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 5. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec),



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility;

1.

Provide materials for "use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and

substratesindicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based ontesting and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of oat

for use in paint system and on substrate indicated,

B.

Chemical Components of FieldApplied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with

thefollowing limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated accordin to40 CF

R 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do

not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more thau 350 g/L, 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total

aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 4. Restricted Components; Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g- Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichiorob enzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. 0. Hexavalent chromium.

P. Isophorone. q- Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. V. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). X. 1,1,1-trichIoroethane. y- Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range,

2.4 PRIMERS .

A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied

at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness

of not less than 1.6 mils. 3. ICI Paints:

a. 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils,



b. 1030-1200 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer: Applied at a

dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness

of not less than 1.0 mil.

2.6 FINISH PAINTS

A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic

latex interior enamel for all Wali applications, unless noted otherwise. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 120XXXX Dulux Professional Aciylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied

at a dry fiim thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film

thickness of not less than 1.25 mils.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with ail electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is

impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation, and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that

were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2, Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible

paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce

paint systems indicated. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

E. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fiirniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to

match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to

formation of durable paint film



. 5. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used, 6. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in-fixtures, grilles,

convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

8. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vamish coat.

F. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as son as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do

not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, eyen surface according to manufacturer's written instructions sand between application.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a

uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners receive a diy fihn thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels, firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

G. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface

or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer

for material and texture. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for

material and texture required. H. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading

rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. I. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller

tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. J. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades

by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

K, Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

L. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.


A. Owner resers'es the right to engage a testing agency for test procedures at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied.

B. Contractor shall provide a "Properly Painted Surface" that is uniform in appearance, color and sheen. It i

one that is free of foreign material, lumps, skins, runs, sags, holidays, misses, strike-through or insufficient coverage. It is a surface which is free of drips, spatters, spills or overspray which were caused by the contractor's work force. Comply PDCA, MPI and SSPC Standards and as specified.



3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board and Plaster 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats:

1) Interior flat acrylic paint at all ceiling applications. 2) Interior low-luster aciylic enamel for wall applications.



METAL LOCKERS

10505-1

SECTION 10505 – METAL LOCKERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Corridor Lockers; Knocked-down, Quiet


1. Division of Section “Rough Carpentry” for furring, blocking, and shims required metal lockers and concealed

within other construction before metal locker installation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show sloping tops, filler panels and other accessories

2. Include locker identification system.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish.

D. Maintenance Data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain locker units and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Installers Qualifications: Lockers to be installed by an experienced agent of the manufacturer

.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of new and existing bases for metal lockers.

B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures.

b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.

3. Warranty period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion..

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Corridor Lockers

a. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.

b. Lyon Metal Products, Inc.

c. Penco Products, Inc., Subsidiary of Vesper Corporation


METAL LOCKERS

10505-2

d. List Industries.

e. DeBourgh Manufacturing Co.

f. ASI Storage Solutions

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications.

B. Fasteners: Zinc-or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts or lock washers for

nuts on moving parts.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each substrate.

1. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls for corrosion

resistance.

2. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.3 CORRIDOR: KNOCKED-DOWN, QUIET METAL LOCKERS

A. Locker Arrangement: Single tier, as scheduled and indicated on Drawings.

B. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides and immediate partitions from steel sheet, flanged for double thickness at

back vertical corners. Comply with the following:

1. Back-Material Sheet Thickness: 0.0239-inch (24 gauge).

2. Side-Material Sheet Thickness: 0.0239-inch (24 gauge).

3. Exposed Ends: Form exposed ends of non-recessed lockers from minimum 0.0589-inch (16 gauge) thick steel

sheet

4. Bottoms to be hot-dipped galvanized..

C. Frames: Form channel frames from minimum 0.0589-inch (16 gauge) thick steel sheet; lapped and welded at

corners. Form continuous integral door strike on vertical frame members. Provide resilient bumpers to cushion

door closing.

1. Latch Hooks: Form from minimum 0.1046-inch (12 gauge) thick steel; welded or riveted to doorframes.

2. Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames between tiers from minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel

sheet. Weld to vertical frame members.

D. Doors: Solid face, quiet door one-piece steel sheet, formed into channel shape at vertical edges and flanged at right

angles at top and bottom edges. Fabricate to prevent springing when opening or closing, and to swing 180 degrees.

Ventilation shall consist of full perimeter opening. Comply with the following:

1. Sheet Thickness: 0.0598-inch (16 gauge) minimum.

2. Reinforcement: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors more than 15 inches wide.

E. Shelves: Provide hat shelf in single tier units; Fabricated from minimum 0.0239-inch (24 gauge) thick, formed steel

sheet, flanged on all edges.

F. Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckle; tight pin; minimum 2-inches high. Weld to inside of doorframe and

attach to door with at least two factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when

door is closed.

1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door more than 42 inches high and at least 2 hinges for each door 42-inches

high or less.

G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Where scheduled, stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so locking

devide does not protrude beyond face of door; pry resistant.

1. Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination locks, built-in key

locks, or padlocks; positive automatic and prelocking.

a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with 3 latch hooks and doors less than 48

inches (1219 mm) high with 2 latch hooks; fabricated from minimum 0.0966-inch-(2.5-mm-) thick steel;

welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.


METAL LOCKERS

10505-3

b. Latching Mechanism: Manufacturer’s standard rattle-free latching mechanism and moving components

isolated with polyethylene, vinyl or nylon to prevent metal-to-metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking

device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without unlocking or

damaging lock or latching mechanism.

H. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Single tier units, three double prong hooks.

I. Accessories:

1. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer’s standard thickness, but not

less than 0.0329 inch (24 gauge) thick.

2. Filler Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer’s standard thickness, but not less than

0.0329 inch (24 gauge) thick.

3. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.0598-inch-(16 gauge) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet.

4. Numbering Plates: Manufacturer’s standard etched, embossed or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers at

least 3/8-inch high..

J. Finish: Baked enamel.

1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

K. Build-in Combination Locks (Cramer Jr. HS and Garber HS): Key-controlled, three number dialing combination

locks, capable of at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key.

1. Master Lock 1630 or equal.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat and free of dents or

distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.

1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a complete installation.

B. Unit Principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back;

and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.

C. Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site using nuts, bolts, screws

or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly..

D. Accessibility Requirements:

1. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that operates with a

force of not more than 5 tbf (22.2 N).

E. Hooks: Manufacturer’s standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

F. Identifcation Plates: Manufacturer’s standard etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates; with numbers and

letters at least 3/8 inch (9mm) high.

G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practicable, without visible fasteners at splice locations;

finished to match lockers. Sloped top corner fillers, mitered.

H. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finish to match lockers. Provide slip joint filler angle

formed to receive filler panel.

I. End Panel: Finished end panel with sloping top for single rows.

2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing, apply manufacturer’s standard

thermosetting balked-enamel finish. Comply with paint manufacturer’s written instructions for application, baking

and minimum dry film thickness.



METAL LOCKERS

10505-4

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.

1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches (910

mm) o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal

distortion, using concealed fasteners.

2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.

B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard fasteners, with no exposed

fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accuratelytogether to form tight,

hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.

1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.

2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.

3. Identification Plates: Attach plates at each recessed door handle with at least two aluminum rivets.

4. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.

5. Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.

6. Attach finished end panels with fasteners per manufacturer’s recommendations to conceal exposed ends of non-

recessed metal lockers.

D. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that

integral locking devides operate properly.

3.2 SCHEDULE

A. Metal Lockers: Where surface mounted metal lockers of this designation are indicated, provide products complying

with the following:

1. Bush Elementary School Corridor Locker Units:

Width: 15 inches

Depth: 12 inches

Height: 60 inches

Configuration: Single Tier

Mounting: Surface Mounted

Base: Existing and Wood, as detailed

Base Height: As detailed

Locking: Equipped for padlock hasp.

Ventilation Method: Quiet Locker ventilation shall consist of full perimeter opening

Top: Sloped metal with closers

Type: Quiet Metal Locker

2. Cramer Jr. Hs Corridor Locker Units:

Width: 15 inches

Depth: 12 inches

Height: 72 inches



Base: Wood, as detailed


Locking: Built-in combination at recessed handle


Top: Sloped Metal with Closers



METAL LOCKERS

10505-5

3. Garber HS Locker Units:

Width: 12 inches

Depth: 15 inches

Height: 72 inches



Base: Wood, as detailed


Locking: Built-in combination at recessed handle.

Ventilation Method: Quiet Locker ventilation shall consist of full perimeter opening.

Top: Sloped Metal with Closers


4. Verellen Elementary School Corridor Locker Units:

Width: 12 inches

Depth: 12 inches

Height: 72 inches



Base: Existing and Wood, as detailed


Locking: Equipped for padlock hasp


Top: Sloped metal with closerspe:




BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 1

SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division 1 -

General Requirements.

1.2 ALTERNATES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted

Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required.

1.3 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide pre-installation consultation with the installing contractor and

owner representative.

B. The equipment manufacturer shall provide factory start-up services to include:

1). Completion of equipment start-up log with a copy supplied to the owner.

C. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year parts warranty.

D. The equipment manufacturer shall provide classroom training in operation and maintenance during the first

year for 4 owner representatives.

E. The equipment manufacturer shall supply one (1) four (4) hour diagnostic service call as needed by the

owner to troubleshoot any unit or system related problems.

F. All service work performed shall be recorded with a complete written description on the manufacturer's

work order form. (No extra cost.)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems,

products, and accessories in a single submittal.

1. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable Building Code.

B. Fire Protection: Conform to State of Michigan.

C. Plumbing: Conform to State of Michigan.

D. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.

1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITION

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions.

B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes

to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Owner and Architect/Engineer before

proceeding.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of General Conditions.


BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 - 2

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not Used



MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 15060 - 1

SECTION 15060 - MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Mechanical demolition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify that abandoned piping, ductwork, and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to

Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect mechanical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with local Utility Company and relocations as required and pay

all fees.

C. Provide temporary systems and connections to maintain existing systems in service during

construction.

3.3 DEMOLITION & EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK

A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of General Conditions and this

Section

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned piping, ductwork, or equipment to source of supply

D. Remove exposed abandoned piping and ductwork, including abandoned piping and ductwork

above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned thermostats and controls and remove devices. Remove abandoned controls

if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank stainless steel cover for

abandoned thermostats and controls which are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

H. Maintain access to existing mechanical installations which remain active. Modify installation or

provide access panel as appropriate.

I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing mechanical

installations, or as specified.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.


MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 15060 - 2

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the requirements of the General Provisions.



PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15121 - 1

SECTION 15121 - PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Flexible pipe connectors.

B. Expansion joints and compensators.

C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. MIL-E-17814E - Expansion Joints, Pipe, Slip-Type, Packed.


A. Provide structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping.

Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided, adequately protect system.

B. Expansion Calculations:

1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).

2. Hot Water Heating: 210 degrees F (99 degrees C).

3. Domestic Hot Water: 140 degrees F (60 degrees C).

4. Safety Factory: 30 percent.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-

ace length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot (meter) and per

assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires

in braid.

2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum

expansion compensation.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external controls.



B. Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


B. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.



B. Design expansion compensating system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer

experienced in design of this work.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices

intact, inspect for damage.

C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging

in place until installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for leak free performance of packed expansion joints.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Steel Piping:

1. Manufacturers

a) Kinnetics

b) Flexonics

2. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel.

3. Exterior Sleeve: Double braided stainless steel.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa) WSP and 450 degrees F .

5. Joint: Flanged.

6. Size: Use pipe sized units.

7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch (20 mm) on each side of installed center line.

B. Copper Piping:

1. Manufacturers:

a) Kinnetics.

b) Flexonics.

2. Inner Hose: Bronze

3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa) WSP and 450 degrees F (232 degrees C).

5. Joint: Flanged or Soldered.

6. Size: Use pipe sized units

7. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch (20 mm) on each side of installed center line.

2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Stainless Steel Bellows Type:

1. Manufacturers:

a) Kinnetics.

b) Flexonics.


3. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inch (45 mm)

4. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

5. Joint: Flanged.


7. Application: Steel piping 3 inch (75 mm) and under.



B. External Ring Controlled Stainless Steel Bellows Type:

1. Manufacturers:

a) Kinnetics.

b) Flexonics.


3. Maximum Compression: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm).

4. Maximum Extension: 5/16 inch (8 mm).

5. Maximum Offset: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

6. Joint: Flanged


8. Accessories: Internal flow liner.

9. Application: Steel piping over 3 inch (75 mm).

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Alignment Guides:

1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame

with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch (25 mm) thick insulation, minimum 3

inch travel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation.

Provide line size flexible connectors.

D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to

isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.

E. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure where necessary. Provide pipe guides so movement is

directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast

connections or apparatus.

F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide

loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.

G. Provide Victaulic piping with minimum one joint per (inch) pipe diameter instead of flexible

connector supported by vibration isolation. Victaulic piping need not be anchored.

H. Provide expansion loops as indicated on drawings.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installing and

certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are

performing satisfactorily.



GAGES AND METERS 15135 - 1

SECTION 15135 - GAGES AND METERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pressure gages and Pressure gage taps.

B. Thermometers and thermometer wells.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.

B. ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi.

C. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

D. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers data [and list] which indicates use, operating range, total

range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Contract Closeout: Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-in, taps,

supports and test plugs.

1.6 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Contract Closeout. Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Supply two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturer: Trerrice.

B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

1. Marshall.

C. Gage: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration

adjustment, black scale on white background.

1. Case: Cast aluminum.

2. Bourdon Tube: Type 316 stainless steel.

3. Dial Size: 4-1/2 inch (114 mm) diameter.

4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.

5. Scale: Psi.


GAGES AND METERS 15135 - 2

2.2 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturer: Trerrice.

B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.

1. Marshall.

C. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum

case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device.

1. Size: 12 inch (305 mm) scale.

2. Window: Clear glass.

3. Stem: Brass, 3 1/2 inch (89 mm) long.

4. Accuracy: 2 percent.

5. Calibration: Both degrees F and degrees C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install positive displacement meters in accordance with AWWA M6, with isolating valves on inlet

and outlet. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.

C. Install one pressure gage per pump, with taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of

pump; pipe to gage.

D. Install gage taps in piping as required.

E. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each

gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.

F. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than

2-1/2 inches (64 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance

from insulation.

G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets.

H. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

I. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating

level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

J. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.2 SCHEDULES

A. Pressure Gages.

1. Pumps.

B. Stem Type Thermometers:

1. Water zone supply and return.

2. Domestic hot water supply and recirculation.



SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140 - 1

SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.

B. Equipment bases and supports.

C. Sleeves and seals.

D. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping

B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

C. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

D. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

E. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

F. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

G. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

H. NFPA 14 - Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

I. UL 203 - Pipe Hanger Equipment for Fire Protection Service

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of components.


A. Conform to applicable code for support of plumbing and hydronic piping.

B. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13.

C. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA 14.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Fire Protection Piping:

1. Conform to NFPA 13 & NFPA 14.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (75 mm): Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought

steel clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier

or steel support.



B. Plumbing Piping - DWV:

1. Conform to ASTM F708.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split

ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.




steel clamp.


8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier

or steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:



ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches (50 to 100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,

double hanger.


7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Steel channels

with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.



steel clamp.


11. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and

concrete pier or steel support.

12. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock

nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.


D. Hydronic Piping:



ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches (50 to 100 mm): Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll,

double hanger.


7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Steel channels

with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.



steel clamp.

10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought

steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.


12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and



concrete pier or steel support.

13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches (100 mm): Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock

nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and

stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.


2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

2.3 INSERTS

A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection

with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to

suit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel

pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing:

prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

E. Firestopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

F. Sealant: Acrylic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete

beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm).

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

3.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering and adjacent

work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum spacing between

hangers.



F. Support vertical piping at every [other] floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze

hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,

pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

3.4 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping.

C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Calk sleeves.

D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and

adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or

escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.5 SCHEDULES

HANGER ROD

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER

Inches (mm) Feet (m) Inches (mm)

1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 3/8

1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8

2-1/2 to 3 10 1/2

4 to 6 10 5/8

8 to 12 14 7/8

C.I. Bell and

Spigot (or No-Hub) 5 1/2

and at Joints



MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 1

SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Stencils.

D. Pipe Markers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve

manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.



B. Record actual locations of tagged valves.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background

color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter with smooth

edges.

B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long

color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters.

2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) long color

field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters.

3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch (300 mm) long

color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters.

4. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: Semi- gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1.


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 2

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or

pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being

conveyed.

2.5 CEILING TACKS

A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head.

B. Color code as follows:

1. Yellow - HVAC equipment

2. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers

3. Green - Plumbing valves

4. Blue - Heating/cooling valves

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces as required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with

sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with manufactures requirements.

D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Identify unit ventilators with plastic nameplates.

F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

G. Identify thermostats/sensors relating to HVAC units or valves with nameplates.

H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

I. Identify HVAC units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

J. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or stencilled painting. Use tags on

piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in

clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight

runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure

or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

L. Identify ductwork with stencilled painting. Identify with air handling unit identification number and

area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or

enclosure, and at each obstruction.

M. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of

panel closest to equipment.



PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 1

SECTION 15260 - PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

B. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

C. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed Cell

Foam).

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and

locations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship

and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with UL 723.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years

experience.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification,

including product density and thickness.

C. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and

insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBERGLASS

A. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).



2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F (-28.9 degrees C).

3. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F (150 degrees C).

4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket

1. ASTM C921, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches.

3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.

4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

C. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive

1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

F. Fibrous Glass Fabric

1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight.

2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft (16 kg/cu m) density.

G. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

H. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

I. Insulating Cement

1. ASTM C449.

2.2 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic

1. Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C).

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C).

c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches.

d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.

e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84 50.

f. Thickness: 10.

g. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

2. Covering Adhesive Mastic

a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet.

2. Finish: Embossed.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.

4. Fittings: (0.016 inch (0.4) mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective

liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; (0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION



A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

C. Insulated cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as

adjacent pipe.

3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.

4. PVC fitting covers may be used.

5. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.

6. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,

pump bodies, and expansion joints.

D. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining

pipe.

3. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.

4. PVC fitting covers may be used.

5. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges

and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

6. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and unions

at equipment.

E. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 2 inches diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

3. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert Material: heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range

F. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

G. For exterior applications, provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with

insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor

barrier cement. Seal with two coats of weather proof paint as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal conditions,

as materials indicated.

3.4 FIBERGLASS INSULATION SCHEDULE

PIPING SYSTEMS PIPE SIZE THICKNESS

Inch Inch

A. Plumbing Systems

Domestic Hot Water Supply ALL SIZES 1"

Domestic Hot Water Recirc ALL SIZES 1"

Domestic Cold Water ALL SIZES 1"

Plumbing Vents Within 10 Feet

(3 Meters) of the Exterior ALL SIZES 1"

Storm Piping (Horizontal)

Roof Sumps and Overflow Drain



B. Heating Systems

Heating Water Supply and Return ALL SIZES 1"

C. Cooling Systems

Chilled Water Supply and Return ALL SIZES 1"

Refrigerant Suction and Hot Gas ALL SIZES 1"

Condensate Drains ALL SIZES 1"



EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280 - 1

SECTION 15280 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Equipment insulation. B. Covering.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation covering. B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification. C. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. D. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. E. Section 15520 - Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. F. Section 15535 - Refrigerant Piping and Specialties: Placement of inserts. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Section [01400 - Quality Control: 01090 - Reference Standards: Requirements for references and standards. B. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric). D. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. E. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. F. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block. G. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. H. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. I. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. J. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. K. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. L. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. M. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type). N. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. O. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. P. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. Q. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. R. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. S. NAIMA National Insulation Standards. T. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. U. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.




A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with NFPA 255. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: Johns Manville. B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products:

1. Certainteed. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.

C. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible. 1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C). 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F (121) degrees C). 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 4. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m). D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:



1. ASTM C921, Vinyl. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch (300 mm) centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 2.2 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic: 1. Jacket: ASTM C921, Sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C). b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F (66 degrees C). c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm-inches. d. Thickness: 10 mil (0.25 mm).

a. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209. 1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet. 2. Finish: Embossed. 3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate. C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and bevelling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system. G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive. H. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. J. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate



flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets. K. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. L. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. M. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. N. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. O. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal equipment. P. Cover glass fiber insulation with aluminum jacket. Q. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over. R. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks: a. Glass Fiber, Flexible Insulation: 1-1/2 inches . B. Heating Systems: 1. Pump Bodies: 2. Air Separators: 3. Expansion Tanks: END OF SECTION 15280


HYDRONIC PIPING 15510 - 1

SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Pipe and pipe fittings.

B. Valves.

C. Heating and Chilled water piping system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

C. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.

D. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

E. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

F. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

G. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

H. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary

Uses.

I. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

J. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.


A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9.


A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9. and applicable state labor

regulations.

C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

C. Include welders certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of General Conditions

B. Store and protect products under provisions of General Conditions.

C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling in place.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING AND CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type fittings.

2. Joints: Screwed, or ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass of ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS, CONDENSATE DRAINS, AND OVERFLOWS

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard drawn.



1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought copper.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under: 150 psig (1 034 kPa) malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous

piping; bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches (50 mm): 150 psig (1 034 kPa) forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping;

bronze flanges for copper piping; 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene bonded to asbestos.

2.4 GATE VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, non- rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, single

wedge or disc, solder ends.

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single wedge,

grooved ends.

2.5 BALL VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,

lever handle, solder ends.

2.6 PLUG COCKS

A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, teflon packing, threaded

ends, with one wrench operator for every ten plug cocks.

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends, with

wrench operator with set screw.

2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C), or lug

ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle.

2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze 45 degree swing disc, screwed ends

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged

ends.

2.9 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities

ASME certified and labelled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings.



F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors

with Section 08305.

G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe

level.

H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Refer to General Conditions.

J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

B. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

C. Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

D. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or isolating

valves are also provided.

E. Use lug end butterfly valves in heating and chilled water systems interchangeably with gate and globe

valves.

F. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.

G. Provide 3/4 inch (20 mm) ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of

vertical risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest drain.

PART 4 - ACCEPTABLE PIPING SYSTEM

4.1 VICTAULIC PRODUCT SPECIFICATION FOR USE WITH CARBON STEEL PIPE (BLACK)

A. IPS Grooved Piping System 1. Victaulic grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may

be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods. All grooved components shall be of one manufacturer (Victaulic Company of America), and conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31.1, B-31.9, ASME, UL/FM, IAPMO or BOCA. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.

B. Pipe/Grooved (Standard wall)

1. Carbon Steel, A-53B/A-106B/A-120 - Roll or cut grooved-ends as appropriate to pipe material, wall thickness, pressures, size and method of joining. Pipe ends to be grooved in accordance with Victaulic current listed standards conforming to ANSI/AWWA C-606.

C. Victaulic Mechanical Couplings for Joining Carbon Steel Pipe

1. Mechanical Couplings a. Mechanical couplings shall be Victaulic Style 07 (Zero-Flex) Rigid coupling or Style HP-

70 Rigid coupling for high pressure service. Victaulic Style 77 or 75 coupling shall be used where system flexibility is desired at pumps and other mechanical equipment to reduce noise and vibration. Noise and vibration reduction is achieved by installing three style 77 or 75 flexible couplings near the vibrations source. Couplings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510.

2. Reducing Mechanical Couplings a. Use Victaulic Style 750 reducing couplings for pipe runs for direct reduction on 2" (50

mm) through 8" (200 mm) pipe sizes. 3. Mechanical Coupling Bolts

a. Mechanical Coupling bolts shall be heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to

physical properties of ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength 110,000 psi (758450 kPa) as provided standard by Victaulic.



4. Victaulic Flange Adapters a. Vic-Flange Adapter Style 741, 2" - 24" (50-600 mm), for connection to ANSI class

125/150 flanged components. Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 or Malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47.

b. Vic-Flange Adapter Style 743, 2" - 12" (50-300 mm), for connection to ANSI class 250/300 flanged components. Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.

5. Victaulic Flanged Adapter Nipples, 3/4" - 24" (20-600 mm), No. 41, 45 and 46 for connection to ANSI class 125, 150 and 300 flanged components.

6. Miscellaneous Connections (Vent, Drain, Pressure, Temperature, Taps, etc.) a. Vic-Let Style 923 - 1/2" or 3/4" NPT outlet on 4" (100 mm) and larger header sizes rated

for 300 PSI (2065 kPa). b. Vic-O-Well Style 924 - To accommodate industrial glass bulb thermometers with

standard 1-1/4" - 18 NEF 2B extra fine thread and 6" (150 mm) nominal bulb length on 4" (100 mm) and larger header sizes rated for 300 PSI (2065 kPa).

c. Outlet Mechanical Coupling - Use Victaulic Style 72 outlet couplings on header sizes 1-1/2" (40 mm) through 6" (150 mm) for grooved or threaded reduced outlet sizes 1/2" (15 mm) through 2" (50 mm).

7. Victaulic Gaskets a. Water and Oil Free Air Service - Shall be Grade "E" EPDM compound (green color

coded) conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z. Temperature operating range -30 degrees F to +230 degrees F (-34 degrees C to +110 degrees C). Use Grade "L" Silicone compound (red color coded) for operating temperatures above +230 degrees F (+110 degrees C) up to +350 degrees F (+177 degrees C).

D. Valves - Grooved-End

1. Butterfly Valves a. 2" - 12" (50-300 mm) Victaulic Series 300 Butterfly Valve, 300 psi (2065 kPa), grooved

ends, polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) coated ductile iron (ASTM A-536) body. Ductile iron disc, rubber encapsulated suited for the intended service. Seat tested to MSS-SP-67. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service. With memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service.

b. 1-1/2" - 6" (40-150 mm) Series 700 Butterfly Valve - 200 psi (1375 kPa) grooved ends Sch. 40 C.S. zinc plated (ASTM B-633) EPDM or Nitrile lined body. Disc aluminum bronze two piece 416 S/S stem design. Seat tested to MSS-SP-67. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service. With memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service.

c. Note: Refer to latest published Victaulic literature, Butterfly Valve Material Selection section, for liner/seat and disc material recommendations for chemical service.

d. Tri-Service Valves - Combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam check valve - Series Vic 300 butterfly valve assembled with standard Vic-Check. Working pressures to 300 psi (2065 kPa). (Optional: Vic-Plug valve Series 377 assembled with standard Vic-Check. Working pressure to 175 psi (1200 kPa). Memory stops standard. Transition couplings Style 307 required for plug valve assembly.)

2. Ball Valves a. Victaulic Series 721 standard port ball valve 1-1/2" - 6" (40- 150 mm) ductile iron,

ASTM A-536, micro finish steel chrome plated or stainless steel ball and stem, TFE seats, 600 psi (4130 kPa).

b. Note: Provide Victaulic Style 722 threaded end ball valve, forged brass body, ASTM B-16, where required for 1/4" (8 mm) through 2" (50 mm) threaded pipe end conditions, 600 PSI (4130 kPa).

3. Check Valves a. Victaulic Series 716 check valve 2-1/2" - 3" (65-80 mm) PPS coated ductile iron body,

ASTM A-536, aluminum bronze non-slam tilting disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, rubber seat suitable for intended service, 300 psi (2065 kPa).



b. Victaulic Series 715 check valve 4" - 8" (100-200 mm) zinc electroplated ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, dual disc non-slam spring loaded design, stainless steel trim, rubber seat suitable for intended service, 500 psi, 4" - 5" (3450 kPa, 100-125 mm) 400 psi, 6" - 8" (2750 kPa, 150-200 mm).

4. Check Valves (Swing)

a. Victaulic Series 712 check valve 2" - 4" (50-100 mm). Horizontal installation. Working pressure to 300 psi (2065 kPa). Ductile body, ASTM A-536, and stainless clapper. EPDM, Nitrile or optional Viton Bumper & Bonnet seals. Stainless wetted parts.

5. Bolted Branch Outlet

a. Branch reductions on 2" (50 mm) through 8" (200 mm) header piping shall be made with Victaulic hole cut products. Style 920 or Style 921 Mechanical-T Outlet with locating collar engaging into hole or Style 72 outlet coupling for use in joining grooved pipe with a branch connection at the joint.

6. Expansion Joints

a. Expansion and contraction compensation shall be achieved utilizing either Victaulic Style 150 Mover 2" - 6" (50-150 mm). Select expansion joint and support method in accordance with design conditions and performance data published in Victaulic literature.

7. Fittings and Coatings

a. Victaulic fittings shall be full flow ductile or cast iron fittings, steel fittings or segmentally welded fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept Victaulic grooved end couplings. Specific style numbers are listed in Victaulic's current catalog.

b. Standard Fittings - Shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510.

c. Note: Use Victaulic Style 47 Dielectric Waterway when connecting dissimilar metals in liquid systems. 1/2" through 4" (15-100) size range available with grooved, threaded or plain end combinations.

d. Coatings: Standard Victaulic fittings and couplings are provided with an alkyd enamel finish. Galvanized fittings and couplings are available and conform to ASTM A-153. Zinc electroplated fittings and couplings conform to ASTM B633.

8. Strainers - Grooved-End

a. Y-Type Strainer. Victaulic Series 732, 300 PSI (2065 kPa) Y-Type Strainer shall consist of ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, Type 304 stainless steel cylindrical removable baskets with 1/16" (1,6 mm) diameter perforations and 41% open area 2" - 3" (50-80 mm) strainer sizes or 1/8" (3,2) strainer sizes diameter perforations and 40% open area 4" - 12" (100-300 mm) strainer sizes for pressures up to 300 psi (2065 kPa).

9. Suction Diffuser - Grooved/Flanged-End

a. Suction Diffuser - Series 731. Rated to 300 psi (2065 kPa). Ductile or steel body. Basket strainer 304 stainless sheet with 3/16" (4.8 mm) diameter holes, 51% open area. Removable start-up prefilter 16 mesh bronze screen. Outlets for pressure/temperature drain connections. Access coupling Style 07. Flange Series 741 ANSI Class 125 or 150 standard.

10. Flow Measuring Sensors - Grooved-End

a. Venturi-Type - Victaulic Style 733 rated 250 psi (1725 kPa). Sizes 2-1/2" - 30" (65-800 mm) diameter. Minimum straight pipe installation of five diameters upstream and two diameters downstream.



HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515 - 1

SECTION 15515 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Air vents.

B. Combination fittings.

C. Relief valves.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code.


A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of tanks.


A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies required for this

project.

C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. Include product

description, model. and dimensions.

D. Submit inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction.

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts

list.


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of General Conditions

B. Store and protect products under provisions of General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR VENTS

A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch (50 mm) diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8

inch (3 mm) brass needle valve at top of chamber.

2.2 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES

A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig (1 200


HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 15515 - 2

kPa) operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring- loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel

stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.

2.3 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, capacities

ASME certified and labelled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance.

B. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

C. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of centrifugal pumps.

D. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.

E. Provide radiator balancing valves on water outlet from terminal heating units.

F. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and

expansion tanks.

G. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity.

Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.

H. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

I. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent

areas.



HYDRONIC PUMPS 15540 - 1

SECTION 15540 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

C. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.



4. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange or union end connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and

Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Motor: Multi speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics: AS SCHEDULED.

2.3 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 3. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate pump for 175-psig (1204-kPa).

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Provide grounding ring on all bearings for VFD operation. 5. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and

Buna-N bellows and gasket. 6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing with grease

fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor and EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.



E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

G. Motor: VFD specific, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment

H. Capacities and Characteristics: AS SCHEDULED.

2.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast iron body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods of sufficient size to support pump weight.

E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.

1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.

2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

3.2 ALIGNMENT

A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.

B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.



C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve.

I. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

END OF SECTION 1554


CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 15545 - 1

SECTION 15545 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cleaning of piping systems. B. Chemical feeder equipment. C. Chemical treatment.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics, electrical

characteristics and connection requirements. C. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical

characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems, piping

configuration, and connection requirements. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under provisions of General Conditions. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and operating

properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment. G. Submit certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of chemicals and

their proposed disposal.


A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. B. Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including sampling points and location of chemical

injectors. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment

including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. Company shall have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical systems, and for to public sewage systems.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.



1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide quarterly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site.

Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.

C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period. D. Include four hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, care,

maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start up of systems. E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate

success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. System Cleaner: 1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum

products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate. 2. Biocide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or

microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones.

B. Closed System Treatment (Water): 1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate.

2. Corrosion inhibitors; liquid boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulphites.

3. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates. 2.2 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER

A. 1.8 gal quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psig. 2.3 WATER METER

A. Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse contact register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch.

B. Electrical Characteristics:

1. 10 rated load amperes. 2. 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

2.4 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Provide white enamel test cabinet with local and fluorescent light, capable of accommodating 4 - 10 ml zeroing titrating burettes and associated reagents.

B. Provide the following test kits: 1. Alkalinity titration test kit. 2. Chloride titration test kit. 3. Sulphite titration test kit. 4. Total hardness titration test kit. 5. Low phosphate test kit. 6. Conductivity bridge, range 0 - 10,000 microhms. 7. Creosol red pH slide complete with reagent. 8. Portable electronic conductivity meter. 9. High nitrite test kit.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 CLEANING SEQUENCE

A. Concentration: 1. As recommended by manufacturer. 2. One pound per 100 gallons (1 kg per 1000 L) of water contained in the system. 3. One pound per 100 gallons (1 kg per 1000 L) of water for hot systems and one pound per 50

gallons (1 kg per 500 L) of water for cold systems. 4. Fill steam boilers only with cleaner and water.

B. Hot Water Heating Systems: 1. Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising temperature to 160 degrees F (71 degrees C) and

maintain for 12 hours minimum. 2. Remove heat and circulate to 100 degrees F (37.8 degrees C) or less; drain systems as quickly as

possible and refill with clean water. 3. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperatures, then drain. 4. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of Architect/Engineer. D. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill. E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed.

Include disassembly of components as required. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and necessary piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. C. Provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test specimens.


2015 BOND PROJECTS FOR



CONDENSING BOILERS 15561 - 1

SECTION 15561 – HOT WATER CONDENSING BOILERS

PART I. GENERAL - HOT WATER CONDENSING BOILER

1.01 SCOPE

A. The work to be performed consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, etc. to furnish and install new factory assembled, low-pressure hot water boilers as described in the specifications herein.


1. Division 15 Section “Chemical Water Treatment” for feedwater treatment.

2. Division 15 Section, “Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks” for connections to chimneys, and

stacks.

3. Division 15 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished

specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, and

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate

between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for

compliance with performance requirements before shipping.

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts

list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.

G. Other:

1. ASME Section IV – Heating Boilers

2. ANSI Z21.13 – Gas Fired Low Pressure Boilers

3. NFPA 64/ANSI Z221.3 – National Fuel Code

4. FM – Factory Mutual

5. ASME CSD-1 – Controls and Safety Devices

6. GE-GAP [Formerly IRI – Industrial Risk Insurers]

7. UL or CSA Standards for Gas Fired Boilers

8. UBC – Uniform Building Code

9. UMC – Uniform Mechanical Code

10. NEC – National Electrical Code

1.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE





A. The equipment shall, as a minimum, be in strict compliance with the requirements of this

specification and shall be the manufacturer's standard commercial product unless specified

otherwise. Additional equipment features, details, accessories, appurtenances, etc. which are not

specifically identified but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard commercial product, shall

be included in the equipment being furnished.

B. The equipment shall be of the type, design, and size that the manufacturer currently offers for

commercial sale and appears in the manufacturer's current catalogue. The equipment shall be new

and fabricated from new materials and shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship

C. The equipment must fit within the allocated space, leaving ample allowance for maintenance and

cleaning, and must leave suitable space for easy removal of all equipment appurtenances.

D. All units of the same classification shall be identical to the extent necessary to ensure

interchangeability of parts, assemblies, accessories, and spare parts wherever possible.

E. To accept unit responsibility for the specified capacities, efficiencies, and performance, the boiler

manufacturer shall certify in writing that the equipment being submitted shall perform as specified.

The boiler manufacturer shall be responsible for guarantying that the boiler provides the

performance as specified herein.

1.04. SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall submit, in a timely manner, all submittals for approval by the engineer. Under

no circumstances shall the contractor install any materials until the engineer has made final approval

on the submittals.

B. The engineer shall review and stamp submittals. Work may proceed and equipment released for

fabrication after contractor receives returned submittals stamped with "NO EXCEPTIONS

TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED".

C. Shop Drawings - Shop drawings shall be submitted to the engineer for approval and shall consist of:

1. General assembly drawing of the boiler including product description, model number, dimensions, clearances, weights, service sizes, etc.

2. Schematic flow diagram of gas valve trains.

3. Schematic wiring diagram of boiler control system of the ladder-type showing all components, interlocks, etc. Schematic wiring diagram shall clearly identify factory wiring and field wiring by others.

E. Manufacturer's Warranties: Manufacturer’s printed warranties, as specified hereinafter, shall be

submitted prior to final acceptance by the engineer.

F. Manufacturer's Field Service: Manufacturer’s printed field service procedures and reports, as

specified hereinafter, shall be submitted prior to final acceptance by the engineer. Report forms

shall contain all information as required to do start-up and testing as specified in the product section.

1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS/MODIFICATIONS

A. The bidder must submit in writing to the engineer any request for a proposed deviation, omission,

modification, or substitution to this specification for evaluation no later than ten (10) days prior to





the bid date.

B. Technical data, drawings, product samples, and complete data substantiating compliance of

proposed substitution with these specifications shall accompany a request for any substitution.

C. No materials shall be deemed acceptable if not in strict and full compliance with these

specifications.

D. All bidders must bid solely on the specified materials unless acceptance by the engineer of a

deviation, omission, modification, or substitution is granted in writing to all bidders prior to the bid

date.

1.06. CERTIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer's Certification: The boiler manufacturer shall certify the following:

1. The products and systems furnished are in strict compliance with the specifications. 2. The boiler, burner, and other associated mechanical and electrical equipment have been

properly coordinated and integrated to provide a complete and operable boiler package.

3. ASME Certification in the form of ASME Stamp on the product and completed and signed data sheet.

4. ASME CSD-1 Certification, in the form of completed data sheet.

5. CSA or UL Certification in the form of an affixed label to the equipment.

6. The specified factory tests have been satisfactorily performed.

7. The specified field tests have been satisfactorily performed.

B. Contractor's Certification: The contractor shall certify the following:

1. The products and systems installed are in strict compliance with the specifications. 2. The specified field tests have been satisfactorily performed.

C. Boiler Inspectors' Certification: All boiler inspections during hydrostatic testing shall be performed

by an authorized boiler inspector who is certified by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Inspectors and shall be submitted in writing prior to final acceptance by the engineer.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance manuals

shall be submitted prior to final acceptance by the engineer. Operation and maintenance manuals

shall contain dimension and wiring drawings, product data, operating instructions, cleaning

procedures, replacement parts list, maintenance and repair data, complete parts list, etc.

1.06. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The contractor shall be responsible for the timely delivery of the equipment to the jobsite. The

contractor shall be responsible for unloading and rigging of the equipment. The contractor shall be

responsible for protecting the equipment from the weather, humidity and temperature conditions,

dirt, dust, other contaminants, as well as jobsite conditions during construction.





B. Equipment shall be unloaded, handled, and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's handling

and storage instructions. C. Responsibility of making freight claims to be performed by contractor or owner personnel.

PART 2 -

2.01 MANUFACTURERS – BASE BID

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Lochinvar, LLC. 2. Heat Transfer Products, Inc. 3. Laars Heating Systems; a division of Waterpik Technologies, Inc. 4. Aerco

B. CONDENSING BOILERS

1. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service only.

2. Heat Exchanger: Nonferrous, corrosion-resistant combustion chamber. 3. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections. 4. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft. 5. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and

postpurge the combustion chamber. 6. Motors:

a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

7. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. 8. Ignition: Spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. 9. Casing:

a. Jacket: Plastic, with snap-in or interlocking closures. b. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. c. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick, polyurethane-foam insulation surrounding

the heat exchanger. d. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. e. Mounting base to secure boiler.

10. Characteristics and Capacities: AS SCHEDULED.

C. MANUFACTURED UNITS

1. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-tube condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water heating service only.

2. Heat Exchanger: Finned-copper primary and stainless-steel secondary heat exchangers.

3. Combustion Chamber: Stainless steel, sealed.

4. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft drawing from gas premixing valve.





5. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner firing sequence and to prepurge and postpurge the combustion chamber.

a. Motors:

i. Motor Sizes: Minimum size large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

6. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

7. Ignition: Silicone carbide hot-surface ignition that includes flame safety supervision and 100 percent main-valve shutoff.

8. Integral Circulator: Cast-iron body and stainless-steel impeller sized for minimum flow required in heat exchanger.

9. Casing:

a. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures. b. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A. c. Finish: Textured epoxy. d. Insulation: Minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the

heat exchanger. e. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars. f. Mounting base to secure boiler.

10. Characteristics and Capacities: AS SCHEDULED

D. STANDARD CONSTRUCTION

1. The boiler shall be constructed in accordance with the following code requirements as standard equipment.

2. CSD1 / Factory Mutual / GE Gap

1. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

2. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. The boiler shall be installed and vented with:

1. Direct Vent system with vertical roof top termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be Category IV approved Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating at the rooftop with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the boiler from the outside. The air inlet pipe shall be stainless sealed pipe. The boiler’s total combined air intake length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The boiler’s total combined exhaust venting length shall not exceed 100 equivalent feet. The air inlet must terminate on the rooftop with the exhaust.





F. The boiler shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of 30 ppm or less corrected to 3% O2. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS - CONDENSING FIRETUBE BOILER – ALTERNATE B-3

A. Contractor shall furnish and install full condensing boiler[s] with input as scheduled on the drawings and performance as noted in these specifications.

1. "Near condensing" copper fin designs, cast iron or "add-on" secondary condensing exchangers

will not be considered.

2. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Cleaver-Brooks model Clear Fire b. Superior Boiler Works model Creek ST c. Triad model Triumph SS d. Lochinvar Crest Series e. Aerco Boilers

B. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. Each unit shall be a Down-fired Firetube type complete with boiler fittings and automatic controls.

The boiler, with all piping and wiring, shall be factory package. Each boiler shall be neatly finished, thoroughly tested and properly packaged for shipping. Boiler design and construction shall be in accordance with Section IV of the ASME Code for hot water heating boilers with a maximum working pressure of 125 PSIG. The boiler shall be CSA or cULus certified as an indirect or direct vent boiler and comply with ASME CSD-1 Code requirements.

C. PERFORMANCE: BOILER SIZE AND RATINGS

1. The capacity of each unit shall be as indicated on the drawing schedule.

D. BOILER DESIGN

1. Boiler shall be a compact, single-pass, vertical down-fired Firetube type, with Duplex stainless steel tubes, tube sheets, and combustion chamber. The boiler pressure vessel shall be completely insulated with a minimum of 2” of insulation and shall be encased in an 18 gauge metal cabinet with powder coated finish. To prevent installation damage, the casing shall be packaged separately and shall ship loose for field installation by the manufacturer’s service representative.

2. The tubes shall be Duplex Stainless Steel and shall be fitted with Aluminum Alloy internal heat

transfer fins creating no less than 10 square feet of fireside heating surface per boiler horsepower.

3. The Vessel shall be mounted on a structural steel stand with exhaust gasses collected in a polymer drain collection box complete with drain fitting for draining condensation from the products of combustion. A condensate neutralizing box complete with limestone chips shall be shipped loose for field installation by contractor. Note: A condensate trap assembly shall be furnished if a condensate collection tray is not provided due to operating conditions.

4. The top tubesheet shall be fully accessible without burner disassembly or removal from the boiler.

The burner assembly shall be complete with lifting hinges and pneumatic lifters. The boiler shall have a built in hinged platform allowing the operator to access the tubesheet, burner, ignition





assembly and flame rod without the use of a ladder.

5. The vessel shall be fully insulated with a minimum of 2” of insulation, guaranteeing external convection and radiation heat losses to the boiler room from the boiler shall be less than 0.5% of the rated input.

6. The condensing capability shall allow the boiler to be operated without the use of a 3-way valve

for the boiler supply water temperature reset. No minimum boiler return water temperature or secondary pump or minimum flow rate shall be required to protect the boiler against thermal shock or for minimum temperature water.

7. Boiler shall be built to seismic zone ___ requirements and manufacturer shall provide seismic

calculations showing tie-down requirements for bolt diameters. Bolts and tie-down shall be by contractor.

8. Each boiler shall be constructed in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Section IV Code and bear the

“H” stamp and shall be manufactured within an ISO 9001 Certified facility to ensure high quality standards.

9. The boiler shall be designed for top rear water outlet and bottom rear water inlet; the water inlet

[return] shall be equipped with internal baffling. Inlet connection size shall be _______ flanged. Outlet connection size shall be _______ flanged. The maximum pressure drop through the boiler shall not exceed 0.45 psi with a 20-degree differential and less than 0.05 psi with a 60-degree differential.

10. The boiler shall be equipped with a second water return connection that will permit low

temperature returns to be utilized for condensing, regardless of the primary return temperature water above condensing conditions.

11. A threaded air vent connection shall be furnished at the top rear of the boiler for field piping to an

expansion tank or for the addition of an auto-vent valve when a bladder type expansion tank is utilized.

12. To drain the boiler, a bottom-threaded connection shall be provided at the front of the boiler and

field piped by the installing contractor with a manual full size shutoff valve to drain.

13. Boiler design shall permit operation with a water condition of 8.0 - 9.5 pH range.

E. BURNER DESIGN

1. General: Forced draft burner mounted in and integral with the boiler hinged top door so when the door is opened the burner head, furnace, tubesheet, and tubes are exposed. The burner door shall utilize easy removable threaded handles, and the burner shall swing upward on hydraulic piston arms, one on each side to provide open support of the burner assembly.

2. A drop down hinged service platform shall be furnished to provide service personnel an easy

means of accessing the burner and controls for service and maintenance. When out of use, this platform shall fold up beneath the front service boiler panel.

3. The burner shall be of the Unitized Venturi, Gas Valve, Blower, and burner head design. This pre-

mix design shall utilize a variable speed fan connected to a venturi to simultaneously modulate fuel and air for a minimum a 5:1 turndown ratio. The venturi design shall also act as a method for compensating for changes in barometric pressure, temperature and humidity so the excess air levels are not adversely affected by changes in atmospheric conditions. External linkages, damper





motor drives and single speed fans shall not be acceptable.

4. Burner head shall be constructed of a Fecralloy-metal fiber for solid body radiation of the burner flame. Combustion shall take place on the surface of the burner mantle, which shall be constructed of a woven fecralloy material creating a 360 degree low temperature radiant flame.

5. Emissions: The equipment shall be guaranteed to limit NOx emissions to 20 PPM or less, as

certified by an independent testing lab. NOx emission levels shall not be exceeded at full operating conditions and at designed turndown of the burner. Proof of such emissions certification shall be made available to the engineer and purchaser and demonstrated at the time of start-up. External flue gas recirculation shall not be accepted for emission control.

6. Gas Train – As a minimum, the gas train shall meet the requirements of CSA/UL and ASME

CSD-1 and shall include:

7. Low Gas Pressure Interlock, manual reset. 8. High Gas Pressure Interlock, manual reset. 9. Upstream and downstream manual test cocks.

10. Ball Type manual shutoff valve upstream of the main gas valve. 11. Unibody double safety gas valve assembly. 12. Gas Pressure Regulator 13. Union connection to permit burner servicing.

14. Combustion Air Proving Switch shall be furnished to ensure sufficient combustion airflow is

present for burner ignition firing.

15. To ensure that proper draft is not blocked in the stack, the burner shall include a High Air Pressure Switch sensing the outlet pressure connection relative to stack back draft.

F. BOILER TRIM

1. Safety valve(s) shall be ASME Section IV approved side outlet type mounted on the boiler air

vent outlet. Size shall be in accordance with code requirements and set to open at 125 psig.

2. Temperature and pressure gauge shall be mounted on the water outlet.

3. Solid State Low water cut-off probe with manual reset and test switch.

4. Manual Reset High Limit Temperature sensor; range not to exceed 210 0 F and shall be an integral device of the Boiler Burner Control and UL recognized as a limit control.

5. Outlet water supply sensing probe for operating water limit setpoint.

6. Return water-sensing probe for operating water limit setpoint.

G. BOILER CONTROLS

1. The Boiler shall include a Falcon Computerized Boiler Burner control which shall be an

integrated, solid state digital micro-processing modulating device, complete with sequence indication, fault reset, mode selection, and parameter set-point. It shall be mounted at the front of the boiler panel for easy access and viewing.

2. Controller shall provide for both flame safeguard and boiler control through separate power

supplied CPU’s (to meet NFPA) and shall perform the following functions:





3. Burner sequencing with safe start check, pre-purge, Electronic direct spark ignition or pilot

ignition (CFC-3300) and post purge. Flame rod or UV scanner (CFC 3300) to prove combustion.

4. Flame Supervision. The control shall provide pre-purge and post-purge and shall maintain a running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent six faults. The control shall be connected to a keyboard display module that will retrieve this information.

5. Safety Shutdown with display of error.

a. Modulating control of the variable speed fan for fuel/air input relative to load requirements.

b. Gas pressure supervision, high and low.

c. Combustion Air Proving Supervision.

d. High Air Pressure [back draft too high] Supervision.

e. The supply temperature and set-point temperature shall be displayed at all times on the touch screen display.

6. Controller shall be equipped with a touch screen display for set up, trouble shooting, and operational display, and shall include ModBus communication capability of this information.

7. Include the programming of system circulating pump and provide the programming of 2 heating loops.

8. All parameter input control set-points shall be factory downloaded with jobsite conditions programmed at the time of initial jobsite operation.

9. All controls to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing the

boiler without disturbing the controls and also located to prevent possible damage by water according to CSA requirements.

10. Electrical power supply shall be 120 volts, 60 cycle single phase (CFC 500-2500) or 208-

230/3/50-60 Hz (CFC 3300) for the fan and 120 volts for control circuit requirements.

11. When multiple boilers are to be installed together, a system integration control shall be provided to stage up to 8 boilers. The control shall include automatic selection of needed boilers based on energy demand, an adjustable outdoor reset schedule, domestic hot water priority, and a system digital display. The control shall force each boiler to a lower fire, before allowing any boiler to operate at high fire. This allows for inverse efficiency (lower fire rate, higher efficiency). The control shall monitor supply water temperature, return water temperature and shall communicate between boilers via RS-485 wiring.

H. BOILER FLUE VENTING

1. The Boiler shall be UL certified as an indirect or direct vent boiler. Venting shall be accomplished with a stainless steel, double-wall, vent piping installed in accordance with applicable national and local codes. In some cases, PVC/CPVC material meeting ULC Type BH Class IIB specifications may be used. Use of PVC/CPVC depends on operating conditions, specific vent suppliers, and any local codes having jurisdiction. Refer to vent manufacturer’s specifications for applicability.

2. For direct venting, the boiler shall have the combustion air intake supply ducted with PVC pipe from the outside. Vibration isolation components are not required.

I. MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

1. General: The boiler supplier’s factory authorized service organization shall be responsible for





performance of inspections, start up and testing of the package boiler, and accessory equipment and materials furnished under this Section. A detailed written record of the start up performance, including burner setting data over the entire load range shall be furnished to the engineer before final acceptance. All labor, equipment, and test apparatus shall be furnished by the authorized service organization. All equipment defects discovered by the tests shall be rectified either by the service organization or boiler manufacturer.

2. Equipment inspection: Boiler representative to provide ___ hours of jobsite assistance to inspect

boilers and other equipment upon arrival, verifying completeness of equipment supplied and potential damages. All shipped loose components, such as casing, to be mounted on boiler by boiler provider after contractor has set boiler in building.

3. Pre start-up walk through: Boiler representative shall spend ___ hours at jobsite reviewing

installation with mechanical contractor to be conducted approximately 1 week prior to startup. 4. Start-up shall be conducted by experienced and factory authorized technician in the regular

employment of the authorized service organization, and shall include:

a. Demonstrate that boiler, burner, controls, and accessories comply with requirements of this Section as proposed by the boiler and accessories supplier. Pre-test all items prior to scheduling the final testing that will be witnessed by the test engineer.

b. Readings at different firing rates (20, 50, 75 and 100%) of load for the modulating burner

shall be taken with a written report of the tests submitted to the engineer. The reports shall include readings for each firing rate tested and include stack temperatures, O2, CO, NOx, and overall boiler efficiency.

c. Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories: Observe and check all valves, draft fans, electric

motors and other accessories and appurtenant equipment during the operational and capacity tests for leakage, malfunctioning, defects, and non compliance with referenced standards or overloading as applicable.

d. Commissioning Requirements:

1) Fireside inspection 2) Set up fuel train and combustion air system 3) Set up operating set points 4) Check all safeties, including Flame safeguard, LWCO, Airflow, Fuel

pressures, High limits. 5) Set up and verify efficiencies at 20%, 50%, 75%, and 100% 6) Set up and verify burner turndown.

5. Training to include all safety procedures, maintenance procedures, control operations, and diagnostic

procedures. Training to be provided in a single 4 hour continuous session to accommodate operator’s availability on site.

J. OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Provide two (2) Operating and Maintenance manuals including cut-away views of boiler and

burner, schematics including fuel trains, general instructions for maintenance and inspections, complete spare parts lists and trouble shooting procedures.

2. A wiring diagram corresponding to the boiler shall be affixed to the boiler near the electrical

panel.





K. WARRANTY DATA

1. The pressure vessel shall be guaranteed against thermal shock for 20 years when utilized in a

closed loop hydronic heating system with a temperature differential of 120 °F or less. The boiler pressure vessel shall be guaranteed accordingly without a minimum flow rate or return water temperature requirement. The boiler shall not require the use of flow switches or other devices to ensure minimum flow.

2. The pressure vessel, tubes and tube sheets (heat exchanger) shall be guaranteed against flue gas

corrosion and materials/workmanship for a period of 10 years. The condensate collection box shall be guaranteed for 20 years. The burner cylinder shall be warranted for a period of 5 years.

3. All parts not covered by the above warranties shall carry a 1 year warranty from startup, or 18

months from shipment, whichever occurs first. This shall include all electrical components and burner components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

Installation shall be provided by the contractor in accordance with the requirements of the codes specified hereinbefore. All of the contractor's work shall be performed by experienced personnel previously engaged in boiler plant construction and shall be under the supervision of a qualified installation supervisor.

3.02. INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in strict compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install equipment in strict compliance with state and local codes and applicable NFPA standards.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around sides and over top of equipment.

D. Install components that were removed from equipment for shipping purposes.

E. Install components that were furnished loose with equipment for field installation.

F. Provide all interconnecting electrical control and power wiring.

G. Provide all fuel gas vent and service piping.

H. Provide all piping for boiler pipe connections.

3.03. FIELD TESTING

A. The manufacturer’s representative shall test all boiler and burner interlocks, actuators, valves,

controllers, gauges, thermometers, pilot lights, switches, etc. Any malfunctioning component shall

be replaced at the time of initial start-up if found to be inoperative.

B. All adjustments to boiler, burner, and boiler control system shall be performed by the

manufacturer’s authorized service representative.

3.04. START-UP, INSTRUCTION AND WARRANTY SERVICE





A. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide start-up and instruction of each new boiler,

including burner and boiler control system as specified herein. Start-up and instruction shall cover

all components assembled and furnished by the manufacturer whether or not of his own

manufacture.

B. Warranty service shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty statement unless other

provisions have been agreed to during project bidding.





SECTION 15575 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 GENERAL


A.Manufactured chimneys for gas fired equipment.

B.Manufactured double wall chimneys for fuel fired equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B. C.ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, General Requirements.

C. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock-Forming Quality.

D. NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) - The National Fuel Gas Code.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

F. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel-Burning Appliances.

G. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

H. UL 103 - Standard for Factory Built Low Heat Chimneys.

I. UL 441 - Standard for Gas Vents.

J. UL 641 - Standard for Low Temperature Venting Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Breeching: Vent Connector.

B. Chimney: Primarily vertical shaft enclosing at least one vent for conducting flue gases outdoors.

C. Smoke Pipe: Round, single wall vent connector.

D. Vent: That portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent

connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used.

E. Vent Connector: That part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an

appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances shall comply with NFPA 211 and

be UL listed and labeled.

B. Design refractory lined metal stacks for wind loading of 110 mph (180 kph).


A. Section - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, dimensions, weights, support and layout of breechings.

Submit layout drawings indicating plan view and elevations [where factory built units are used].

C. Product Data: Provide data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of components

and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Section - Submittals: Submittals for information.

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, and connection

requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.




B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by

manufacturer.

C. Design stacks under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this

Work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.


A. Conform to NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) code for installation of natural gas burning appliances and equipment.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2PRODUCTS

2.1 BREECHING

A. Fabricate of ASTM A569 carbon steel. Fabricate breechings less than 24 inch (600 mm) diameter of ASTM

A527 galvanized sheet steel, lock forming quality with ASTM A525 [G90] [G165] zinc coating.

B. Fabricate breechings from following minimum gages. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible.

1. Sizes up to 12 inches (300 mm): 18 gage (1.2 mm).

2. Sizes 13 to 24 inches (325 to 600 mm): 16 gage (1.5 mm).

3. Sizes 25 to 36 inches (625 to 900 mm): 14 gage (1.8 mm).

C. Provide adjustable self-actuating barometric draft dampers, where indicated, full size of breeching.

D. Provide cleanout doors of same gage as breeching, where indicated on Drawings.

E. B.Fabricate breeching fittings to match adjoining breechings. Fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal

to breeching diameter. Limit angular tapers to 20 degrees maximum.

2.2 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS

A. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in compliance

with UL 441.

B. Provide double wall metal stacks, tested to [UL 103] [UL 127] [UL 641] and UL listed, for use with building

heating equipment, in compliance with NFPA 211.

C. Fabricate with 1 inch (25 mm) minimum air space between walls. Construct inner jacket of 20 gage (0.9

mm) ASTM A167 [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless steel. Construct outer jacket of [aluminum coated steel]

[[Type 304] [Type 316] stainless steel] 24 gage (0.6 mm) for sizes 10 inches to 24 inches (250 mm to 600

mm) and 20 gage (0.9 mm) for sizes 28 inches to 48 inches (700 mm to 1200 mm).

D. Accessories, UL labeled:

1. Ventilated Roof Thimble: Consists of roof penetration, vent flashing with spacers and storm collar.

3. Exit Cone: Consists of inner cone, and outer jacket, to increase stack exit velocity 1.5 times.

4. Stack Cap: Consists of conical rainshield with inverted cone for partial rain protection with low flow

resistance.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. C.Install in accordance with [NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1) and NFPA 31.

C. Install breechings with minimum of joints. Align accurately at connections, with internal surfaces smooth.

D. D.Support breechings from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold

to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breechings, chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot (4 m) spacing, to

adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards -




Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size.

E. E.Install concrete inserts for support of breechings, chimneys, and stacks in coordination with formwork.

F. F.Pitch breechings with positive slope up from fuel-fired equipment to chimney or stack.

G. Coordinate installation of dampers, and induced draft fans. Refer to Section 16180.

H. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble

pipe and accessories as required for complete installation.

I. Assemble and install stack sections in accordance with NFPA 82, industry practices, and in compliance with

UL listing. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to ASTM C105. Connect base section to foundation

using anchor lugs.

J. Level and plumb chimney and stacks.

K. Clean breechings, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris.

L. At appliances, provide slip joints permitting removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of

breechings, breeching insulation, chimneys, or stacks.

M. Provide minimum length of breeching to connect appliance to chimney. Provide Type B chimney

continuously from appliances.



TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 1

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1- GENERAL


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.

C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions

E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AABC - National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.

B. ASHRAE - 1984 Systems Handbook: Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

C. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.

B. Submit test reports as a submittal under provisions of General Conditions.

C. Submit test reports under provisions of General Conditions.

D. Prior to commencing work, submit draft reports indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data

required.

E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for

Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

F. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing

tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and

equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

G. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National Project

Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.

1.4 REPORT FORMS

A. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. Forms shall include the following information:

1. Title Page:

a. Company name

b. Company address

c. Company telephone number

d. Project name

e. Project location

f. Project Architect

g. Project Engineer

h. Project Contractor

2. Instrument List

a. Instrument

b. Manufacturer

c. Model

d. Serial number



e. Range

f. Calibration date

3. Air Moving Equipment:

a. Location

b. Manufacturer

c. Model

d. Air flow, specified and actual

e. Return air flow, specified and actual

f. Outside air flow, specified and actual

g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

h. Inlet pressure

i. Discharge pressure

j. Fan RPM

4. Exhaust Fan Data:

a. Location

b. Manufacturer

c. Model

d. Air flow, specified and actual

e. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

f. Inlet pressure

g. Discharge pressure

h. Fan RPM

5. Return Air/Outside Air Data:

a. Identification/location

b. Design air flow

c. Actual air flow

d. Design return air flow

e. Actual return air flow

f. Design outside air flow

g. Actual outside air flow

h. Return air temperature

i. Outside air temperature

6. Required mixed air temperature

a. Actual mixed air temperature

b. Design outside/return air ratio

c. Actual outside/return air ratio

7. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer

b. HP/BHP

c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.

d. RPM

e. Service factor

f. Starter size, rating, heater elements


A. Submit record documents under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Accurately record actual locations of flow measuring stations. balancing valves and rough setting.




A. Agency shall be company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified in this

Section with certified by AABC. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and

Balance Engineer.

B. Total system balance shall be performed in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field

Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.


A. Sequence work under the provisions of General Conditions.

B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before

Substantial Completion of Project.

C. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of life safety smoke evacuation smoke

control system with Fire Authority.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene a conference one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of

General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before commencing work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following:

1. Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final

filters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Correct fan rotation.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

11. Duct system leakage has been minimized.

12. Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented.

13. Correct pump rotation.

14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.

15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Report any defects or deficiencies noted during performance of services to Architect/Engineer.

C. Promptly report abnormal conditions in mechanical systems or conditions which prevent system

balance.

D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as observed.

E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION



A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments

available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Adjust air handling systems to plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent

for return and exhaust systems from figures indicated.

B. Adjust hydronic systems to plus or minus 10 percent of design conditions indicated.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of General Conditions.

B. Recorded data shall represent actually measured, or observed condition.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be

restored. Set and lock memory stops.

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption

has been rectified.

E. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to

electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

F. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as

selected and witnessed by the Owner.

G. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust

air quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and

noise.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not create

objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as

dampers and splitters.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary

branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and

total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design

conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.

Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate,

full heating.



3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to determine flow

rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on

temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to

thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air

balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do

not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full

flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. END OF SECTION 15990


BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.

1.2 ALTERNATES

A. Refer to Section 01030 - Alternates for submission requirements, and procedures for selection/award of alternates.

B. Electrical contractor shall review each alternate to determine if said alternate affects electrical trades. All electrical trade items shall be quoted for inclusion by the general contractor.

C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under Requirements of General Conditions. B. Submit shop drawings for the following items:

-Wiring devices (receptacles, switches, etc.) -Disconnect switches -Panelboards -Motor controls C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related

systems, products, and accessories in a single submittals. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.


A. Electrical: Conform to National Electrical Code. B. Obtain permits, and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction.

C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including

changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding.


A. Construct Work in sequence under requirements of General Provisions. 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Only manufacturers listed will be approved for installation on this project. If a manufacturer is not

listed and wishes to be considered as an "OR EQUAL", he shall submit catalog cuts of the equipment to be considered no later than 10 days before bids are due. Catalog cuts shall contain



dimensions, voltage(s), amps, horsepower, photometrics, and any additional information requested by the Architect/Engineer.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain 3 copies of documents on site. 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under Requirements of General Provisions. B. Provide marked-up "As-Built" blueprints. C. Provide 4-copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Manuals shall contain a copy of shop

drawings, manufacturer equipment drawings (if different from shop drawings), equipment installation and maintenance guides, etc. Manuals shall be bound into a book form. (Three ring binders are acceptable).

1.11 FIELD VERIFICATION A. These drawings are symbolic and diagrammatic and are not intended to be shop drawings. B. Prior to submitting bids contractor shall visit and familiarize himself with the site. No extras will

be given for his/her failure to do so. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of all electrical equipment and connections with other contractors. No

extras will be given for failure to coordinate conduit/box requirements or any electrical equipment and or connections with other contractors.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under Requirements of General Provisions. B. Store and protect products under Requirements of General Provisions. C. Accept products on site in factory shipping splits and verify damage. D. Protect products from moisture and debris by storing in a clean, dry heated space. Maintain

factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units. Provide auxiliary heating in switchgear and transformer sections in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

1.14 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING

A. All temporary 125 volt, single phase, 15 and 20 amp receptacles shall have GFCI protection. B. All lamps for temporary lighting shall be protected by a suitable fixture or lampholder with a

guard. C. The Electrical Contractor shall provide 120/240 volt, single phase temporary power as required for

construction. Use of existing service in existing buildings shall be permitted as long as such usage does not inconvenience the owner at any time. If other trades require different voltages and/or phases, then that contractor shall pay any fees associated with furnishing that service.

1.15 UTILITY FEES

A. The contractor shall be responsible for paying all utility connection and/or relocation fees including (but not limited to) electric, telephone, and security system.


MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060 - 1

SECTION 16060 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Electrical demolition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to

Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during

construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.

3.3 DEMOLITION & EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of General Conditions and this

Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling

finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit

servicing them is abandoned and removed. Coordinate with architectural trades for patching of surfaces. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed or patched.

F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.

G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR


MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060 - 2

A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the requirements of the General Provisions. END OF SECTION 16060


CONDUIT 16111 - 1

SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. E. Nonmetal conduit. F. Fittings and conduit bodies.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit. D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable

assemblies. E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F. NECA "Standard of Installation." G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and

Intermediate Metal Conduit. H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). I. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing, when shown on Drawings, is in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: 3/4" for homeruns, 1/2" for drops to devices unless otherwise specified. B. Underground Installations:

1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit. D. In Slab Above Grade:

1. Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing and thickwall nonmetallic conduit.


CONDUIT 16111 - 2

2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch; 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic

tubing. F. Dry Locations:

1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing.

G. Connections to items subject to movement or vibration: 1. Dry locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

2. Wet, Damp or Corrosive Atmosphere Locations: Use liquidtite flexible metal conduit. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.

2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel, compression type.

2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis

hangers, and split hangers. D. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces.

E. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary

supports F. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. G. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. H. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. I. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. K. Do not cross conduits in slab.


CONDUIT 16111 - 3

L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104

degrees F (40 degrees C). N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Q. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic

conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

R. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.

S. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

T. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Conduits run outdoors shall be sealed watertight.

U. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. Install grounding bonding jumper under provisions of Section 16170.

V. Provide suitable pull wire in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. W. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. capped

conduits shall be sealed watertight. X. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of section 16170. Y. Install a separate equipment grounding conductor in all nonmetallic conduit and flexible conduit

under provisions of Section 16170. Z. Flexible metal conduit and liquid tight flexible conduit shall be as short as possible while still

allowing for vibration or movement. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the Requirements of General Provisions.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified under Architectural Sections.



BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 1

SECTION 16123 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. All conductors shall be copper. Aluminum conductors will not be acceptable. C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and

cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Include wire and cable lengths within 10 feet of location shown. No "extra's" will be given for relocation of switches or receptacles within 10' of location shown prior to rough-in installation.

D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THW THHN/THWN

2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Provide split bolt connectors, solderless pressure connectors, spring wire connectors and

compression connectors as required for a complete installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.3 WIRING METHODS

A. Use only building wire, Type THW THHN/THWN insulation in raceway.


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 2

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Use stranded conductors for all power circuits. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. G. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. H. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. J. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. K. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. L. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible

temperature rise. M. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape

uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

N. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.

O. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.


A. Perform field inspection and testing under Requirements of General Provisions. B. Inspect wire for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's

recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.



BOXES 16130 - 1

SECTION 16130 - BOXES

PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. C. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).


A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10 feet of location shown. No "extra's" will be given for relocation of switches or receptacles within 10' of location shown prior to rough-in installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes less than 100 cubic inches: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Sheet Metal Boxes greater than 100 cubic inches: 1. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure.

2. Covers: flat steel, held closed by sheet metal screws. 3. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

C. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box. 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.



BOXES 16130 - 2

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling

access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and

methods under the Provisions of Architectural Sections. F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each

other. G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas. H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inch separation.

Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for

surface finish thickness. J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal

conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. O. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations. R. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any dimension.

1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure. 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.

3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for products furnished under other sections. B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Architectural Sections. C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.

Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and

backsplashes. E. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closure in unused box opening.



GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1

SECTION 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NPFA 99 - Health Care Facilities.

1.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Rod electrode.


A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODE

A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 10 feet.

2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Material: Bronze. 2.3 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Drive rod electrodes such that the top is 3'-0" minimum below grade. Install additional rod

electrodes spaced no closer than 6' apart as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. C. Provide properly sized bonding jumpers for water meters, conduit and raceway expansion fittings

to meet Regulatory Requirements.


GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2

D. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. E. Equipment Grounding Conductor:Where indicated on drawings Provide separate, insulated

conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.


A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation.

B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall- of-potential method.



SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. NECA - National Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of

equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.


A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. F. Do not drill or cut structural members. G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon

head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. I. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch

off wall. J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in

hollow partitions.


SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 2



ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1

SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates and labels. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. a. Panelboards b. Starters c. Disconnect switches

C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.



ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 1

SECTION 16481 - ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Manual motor starters. B. Combination magnetic motor starters.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. ANSI/IEEE 344 - Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class 1E Equipment for

Nuclear Power Generating Stations. C. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current- Limiting Types. D. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses. E. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. F. FS W-P-115 - Power Distribution Panel. G. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). H. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted. I. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. J. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. K. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. L. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. M. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS

A. Square "D" B. General Electric C. Allen-Bradley D. Cutler-Hammer E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.

2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS

A. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, 1 pole, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light and toggle operator.

B. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor locations and type 3R for exterior locations. 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS

A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.

B. Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type. C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.

D. Size: NEMA ICS 2; size as shown on Drawings. E. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2; melting alloy. F. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 for indoor locations and type 3R for exterior locations. G. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with non-fusible switch disconnect in


ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 2

common enclosure. H. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact. I. Indicating Lights: NEMA ICS 2; RUN: green in front cover. J. Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO, in front cover. K. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, 100 VA minimum, in each motor starter.

2.4 CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTING MEANS

A. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.

B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate Class RK5 fuses.

2.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES

A. Bussman B. Gould-Shawmutt C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 16010.

2.6 FUSES

A. Fuses: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK5; dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 600 volt.

B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Motor Starter Panelboard Installation: In conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. C. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor characteristics. D. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor

served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.



VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16482 - 1

SECTION 16482 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

M. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

N. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

O. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.



1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Product certificates.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

C. Application: Constant torque and variable torque.



D. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."

2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."

3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

G. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F (minus 10 deg C) and not exceeding 104

deg F (40 deg C). 8. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not

exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C) 9. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m). 11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 12. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the

base load current for three seconds. 13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control electrical signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds.



5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFC and Motor Overload/Over temperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection

system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC over temperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor over temperature fault.

L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

M. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

N. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

O. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

P. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

Q. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA KS 1, fusible switch with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating. 2. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFC

input current rating, whichever is larger.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.



B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Running log of total power versus time. 2. Total run time. 3. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:

a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) 0- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent).



e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz). g. Coordinate with Honeywell for BAS interface.

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (over temperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: Two.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display VFC status and alarms and energy usage. Allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet . 2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet, protocols

accessible via the communications ports.

2.3 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.

2.4 BYPASS SYSTEMS

A. Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter.

B. Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFC. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.

C. Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator interface or automatic control system feedback.

D. Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. 2. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactor.



3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

E. Bypass Controller: Three-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter input and output and permit safe testing and troubleshooting of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode.

1. Bypass Contactor: Load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. 2. Input and Output Isolating Contactors: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactors. 3. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe

troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

F. Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.

1. NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. 2. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch. 3. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFC while the motor is

running in the bypass mode. 4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

b. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

6. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2.

2.5 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Damper control circuit with end of travel feedback capability.

B. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated."



2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oil tight type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered type momentary. b. Pilot Lights: LED type; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

E. Supplemental Digital Meters:

1. Elapsed time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter.

F. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 1; UL 508 component recognized: Supply fan, with stainless steel intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For



controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFC on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed.

1. Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." 2. Structural-steel channels are specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If

outside this range for any motor, notify Engineer before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance

Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;

otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

E. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer before increasing settings.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.


CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S PROJECT MANUALehps.sharpschool.net/UserFiles/Servers/Server... · The...

Documents

Transcript of CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S PROJECT MANUALehps.sharpschool.net/UserFiles/Servers/Server... · The...